JP6638296B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine.

  Conventional gaming machines are provided with a variable winning device that takes an entry-permissible state that allows a game ball to enter when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When a game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area, the player There is known a gaming machine that is in a gaming state that is advantageous for the player (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-28117 A

  In the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of types of gaming states (special gaming states) having different probabilities that gaming balls enter the specific area are set to be generated, the gaming balls enter the specific area in each special gaming state. It is preferable that the probability of execution is a probability according to the manufacturer's setting, and there is room for improvement in this regard.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, in a special game state in which the probability of a game ball entering a specific area is set low, it is easy to avoid a situation in which a game ball accidentally enters a specific area. It is intended to provide.

The gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to solve the above problems,
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given more than a normal gaming state is more likely to be established when a predetermined winning condition is established, wherein the special gaming state combines a plurality of rounds Gaming machine configured with
A distribution mechanism capable of distributing game balls to a plurality of regions including the specific region, and capable of generating an accessible state in which the game ball can enter the specific region in at least a part of the plurality of rounds,
A switching mechanism provided upstream of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance a game ball to the distribution mechanism;
Operation control means for performing control including operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control unit that generates a specific game state more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area,
As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state having a higher probability that a game ball enters the specific area as compared to the first special game state are provided.
The operation control means sets, as a part of the second special game state, a progress period during which a predetermined number of game balls set to at least two or more can progress from the distribution mechanism to the side where the specific area is provided. To generate,
Means for suppressing entry of a game ball into the specific area when the first special game state has occurred and when the second special game state has occurred. A feature is provided in that there is provided an entry restraining means for allowing game balls to enter the specific area when the predetermined number or more game balls advance to the specific area .

  The gaming machine according to the present invention provides a gaming machine that can easily avoid a situation where a gaming ball accidentally enters a specific area in a special game state in which the probability that the game ball enters a specific area is set low. can do.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in an open state. A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state. A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state. Front view of pachinko machine Front view of pachinko machine with front block removed Front view of gaming board Back side perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flow chart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Explanatory diagram for explaining a unit game in which a reach display of a decorative symbol is definitely or selectively generated in a probable change game state Explanatory drawing for explaining transition of the internal state in the probable change game state Explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution of unit games that generate a reach display of decorative symbols deterministically and selectively in the probable game state Explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution of unit games that generate reach display of decorative symbols deterministically or selectively in the probable change game state Explanatory diagram for explaining the reach effect in the probable changing game state Flowchart showing an example of special symbol related processing in main control interrupt processing Flow chart showing an example of the special symbol change start process in the special symbol related process Flow chart showing an example of the stop symbol generation process in the special symbol change start process Explanatory diagram showing parameters for associating the big hit symbol random value with the symbol identification value Explanatory diagram showing the correlation between the jackpot symbol random value, the symbol identification value, and the mode of the special game state Explanatory drawing showing calculation for generating a stop symbol identification value from a symbol identification value Explanatory drawing showing the replacement of the stop symbol identification value when the stop symbol identification value is within a predetermined value range Explanatory diagram showing the correlation between the symbol identification value, the stop symbol identification value, and the light emission pattern Flowchart showing an example of the start winning process in the special symbol related process Flowchart showing an example of a hold information output setting process in the start winning process Flow chart showing the progress of the game state Game state specification diagram Diagram illustrating the relationship between the progress of time and the number of obtained balls in the probable changing game state Diagram showing the downflow path on the right side of the game area Structure explanation drawing of the winning device unit Operation control explanatory diagram of the winning device unit Timing chart showing main operations of the winning device unit Illustration of the operation of the winning device unit Flowchart showing an example of a timer update process Flowchart showing an example of the upper winning award allowable processing Flowchart showing an example of processing during the upper prize winning prohibition Explanatory drawing of the mechanism which makes a game ball enter a specific passage according to the second embodiment. Flowchart showing an example of a power failure monitoring process according to the second embodiment Explanatory drawing of the lower large prize winning device according to the third embodiment.

  With regard to the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball game machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described, followed by a description of a modified example and other types of gaming machines. First, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural configuration>
First, the configuration of the structural part of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 2 shows a front block 102 and an intermediate block 103 integrated with an outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Is shown. FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 has been removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each drawing, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is configured to be displaceable.

  The outer frame 101 has a function as main body support means for supporting the main body of the pachinko machine 100. The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrangular frame body in which a top plate 111, a bottom plate 112, a left plate 113, and a right plate 114 are assembled. And is firmly fixed by fixtures (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 101 or the main body corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101. A structure in which a supporting mechanism for supporting and a part of a locking mechanism for locking a main body thereof is provided in the island facility may be adopted.

  Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block supporting mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 rotates one end (left side) in the left-right direction when the pachinko machine 100 is viewed from the front. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the outer frame 101, for example, as shown in FIG. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, a shaft provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by a shaft support provided in the outer frame 101, and a shaft hole provided in the shaft support is provided. Is configured to be rotatable by being inserted. The configuration in which the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side, and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined detachment operation, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a predetermined amount or more and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a predetermined amount. You. Thus, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be detached from the outer frame 101.

  On the front side of the intermediate block 103, the front block 102 is disposed so as to overlap, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in front view. The front block supporting mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block supporting mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 to be rotatable forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove the front block 102 by a predetermined removing operation. It is configured to be possible.

  The rear block 104 is disposed on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 so as to overlap with the intermediate block 103, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are arranged by rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. In addition, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined detachment operation.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front block locking mechanism. A lock operating mechanism operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism is provided. As shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

  When a clockwise rotation operation using an operation key (not shown) is performed as a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 and the movable portion 143 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is released, and the intermediate block 103 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

  On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided on the intermediate block 103 is operated in response to a left rotation operation of the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 and the movable portion 144 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is released, and the front block 102 is opened and closed with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism for restricting opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. By the rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing are prohibited (opening / closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing are permitted (opening / closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation. It has been.

  The rear block opening / closing restricting mechanism includes, for example, two open / close restricting portions 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one open / close restricting portion 150C provided in the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. . These three opening / closing restricting portions 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change their engagement states with the opening portions arranged to be overlapped in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation. And an openable / closeable posture corresponding to the openable / closeable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the opening / closing allowance posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is allowed to open / close with respect to the intermediate block 103. The open / close prohibition posture and the open / close permissible posture may be switched between the open / close prohibition state and the open / close permissible state by changing at least one of the positions and directions of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C. It may be configured to move in a fixed direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to a change in posture when a component member in each device shifts between a plurality of postures.

  Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed on the rear block 104 in the open / close prohibition state of the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed through the opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the openable / closable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103. Has been raised.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulating mechanism for regulating the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. The game ball movement regulation mechanism is configured by, for example, a combination of a flow-down regulation piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a regulation change section 162 provided in the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. The flow-down regulating piece 161 is configured to be biased by a coil spring (not shown) to the front side where the front block 102 is located.

  In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down regulating piece 161 is in a movement-permissible state in which a game ball is allowed to flow down. The change unit 162 presses and pushes the rear side of the intermediate block 103. The flow-down regulating piece 161 is arranged to be shifted rearward with respect to a guide path (not shown) for guiding a game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (an open state of the front block 102), the pressing of the flow-down regulating piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. As a result, a movement-prohibiting state in which the flow-down regulating piece 161 projects toward the front block 102 is set. The downflow restricting piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the downflow of the game ball to the downstream side. Thereby, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the previous block 102 is prohibited.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 100 has the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101, for example, at the lower end of the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front end side (left side in rear view). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the operation is performed is provided. Also, as shown in FIG. 3, for example, the intermediate block 103 is provided at the lower end on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and at the rotation front end (right side in front view). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided for 103.

  Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

 As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 forms a substantially entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100, is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates a front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 mainly includes a base frame 201 made of a synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components before and after the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front side of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached to. In a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 constituting the front block 102 are combined, the opening 210A is formed to penetrate in a front-rear direction over a wide area excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, An auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls, and a firing operation device 250 operated by a player to fire the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 includes, as a part of the front decorative body 210, an opening peripheral portion 211 surrounding the periphery of the opening 210A, and a front protruding portion below the opening 210A. An upper protruding portion 217, a lower protruding portion 218 positioned below the upper protruding portion 217 and protruding forward, and an upper protruding portion 217 and a lower protruding portion on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218. A flat portion 219 formed of a substantially flat region located on the back side of the projection operation device 218 and on which the firing operation device 250 is arranged is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is disposed on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is disposed on the lower protrusion 218.

  The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visible while closing the opening 210A formed through in the front-rear direction when the base frame 201 and the front decoration body 210 are combined. The center panel 220 has, for example, a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light-transmitting light fitted into the front side of the panel frame 221 as shown in FIGS. And a light-transmissive rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap behind the panel frame 221. I have.

  The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing the game balls obtained according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent from the game hall. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage unit 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 has an inlet 231A for allowing game balls to flow into the storage unit 231 from the inside of the pachinko machine 100, and an outlet (not shown) for allowing game balls to flow from the storage unit 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream of the outlet is provided. By opening the release port, the game ball is released from the storage section 231 to the player without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removing mechanism has a function of switching the destination of the game ball between the outlet and the outlet.

  The game balls obtained in accordance with the progress of the game and the game balls lent in response to a lending operation performed on a lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inlet 231A. The storage section 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which game balls owned by the player are manually inserted, or game balls lent out at the game hall are supplied.

  The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a line. When the ball removing operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 232 is not performed, the game ball is guided to a launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation is being performed on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes a storage part 241 having inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and a discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and a discharge port 241B. The ball removing mechanism 243 for operating the ball removing mechanism 243 is provided. The game balls or the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but flow into the storage section 241 through the inflow port 241A when the storage section 231 is full. In addition, even in response to the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C.

  The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the release port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, when the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball-pulling operation member 242 by the ball-pulling operation member 242, the release port 241B is kept in the open state until the ball-pulling operation member 242 is returned (for example, a pressing operation again). Will be maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241 is provided behind the inflow port 241A.

  The firing operation device 250 includes, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, a pedestal 251 protruding forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decoration 210, a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that a player is in contact with the firing handle 252, A firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) for disabling the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, game balls are emitted from the firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) at an intensity corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation. Note that when the contact sensor 254 has not detected contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or when the firing operation has been disabled by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 has been rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the firing device 330.

  Further, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap with the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decoration 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge 211 includes an upper central edge 211A, a left upper edge 211B and an upper right edge 211C located on the left and right sides of the upper central edge 211A, and a left upper edge. A left edge portion 211D located below the upper edge portion 211B and a right edge portion 211E located below the upper right edge portion 211C as light emitting portions. Devices 271 to 275 are provided.

  The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper center edge 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left edge 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting corresponding to the upper right edge 211C. It comprises a device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 has one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and integrates and electrically connects these electronic components. And a printed circuit board.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with, for example, an upper left sound output port 211F and an upper right sound output port 211G above the opening peripheral portion 211 thereof. An upper left sound device 281 and an upper right sound device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right sound output port 211G and the upper right sound output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located at the back (rear) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

  In the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 1, for example, a game ball lending device 290 is provided on the upper right side of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays a numerical value corresponding to the balance of bills, cards, and the like inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged alongside the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending. A lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the game, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, and the like inserted into the card unit. When a bill or a card is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which numerical values corresponding to the amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. In response, a predetermined number of game balls are lent from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated with the rent of the game balls. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, a card in which a banknote equivalent or a balance corresponding to the balance is recorded is returned from the card unit in accordance with the return operation.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows a player to perform an input operation different from a firing operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a pressing operation device 261 that can perform a pressing operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up, down, left, and right direction operation. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player-related operation It is possible to execute an effect setting operation or the like for inputting information and executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game arcade as necessary. It has been. Note that an input operation unit (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) with which the player contacts the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or driven by input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that the operation such as vibration is configured to be executable by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation, or By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanying the input operation, such as actively prompting the input operation.

  Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and has a function of attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104 to integrate the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including a game board 400 to a base frame 301.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) which is attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism for rotatably and detachably supporting the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism for fixing the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. A firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) for emitting, a main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress comprehensively, and based on commands from the main control device 370. A sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effects and state notification.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding game balls discharged from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B where the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are formed of various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271). 275, the upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282) and devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rear block 104. Including the wiring, the signal relay device 311 has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 has a flat base 401 having a through hole through which game balls such as an outlet 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. 402, an inner rail 403 smoothly curved from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, a return ball preventing mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and an upper right end of the outer rail 402. And a recoil prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball fired from a firing device 330 described later into a game area. The return ball preventing mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once discharged into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed between the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 facing in parallel to return to the launch passage 401B. The anti-recoil member 405 has a shock-absorbing property to prevent a large rebound of the game ball such that a game ball heading to the right over the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left through the upper center again. For example, it is formed of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage 163 is formed in a lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the outer rail 402 and the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the firing device 330 in the direction of the firing path 401B, and is fired from the firing device 330 but not beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning in the passage 401B is returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 disposed below the gap.

  The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (falls down) in the game area while dropping by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which a region having a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is mostly used. The outer periphery of the game area is generally defined by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is defined by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is defined by the base 401 of the game board 400. Is divided into In addition, various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feed mechanism 331 that sequentially sends game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to a firing position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (see FIG. 10). ), A firing mechanism 333 that ejects a game ball disposed at a firing position, a firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and a game ball fired from the firing mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing passage 401B. The firing device 330 operates in response to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 as described above, and the driving control of the firing solenoid 334 changes according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 to adjust the firing force.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a two-part board case 371 that houses the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed in a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so as not to be opened without leaving a trace.

  The main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, a mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. Thus, not only the rear side (front side) of the main controller 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main controller 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main controller 370 is attached to the gaming board 400. It can be easily checked with the camera attached. Main controller 370 may be connected to attachment portion 372 such that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and the state of removal of main controller 370 may be easily managed.

  The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10), and a board case 391 having a split structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is, for example, like the main control board 920, and is housed in a light-transmitting board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

  Here, various structures arranged in the game area in the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a downflow changing member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the downflow direction or downflow speed of the game ball, and a center arranged at a substantially center of the base 401. A structure 420, a starting device (specifically, an upper middle starting winning device 431A and a lower middle starting winning device 431B) according to a first special symbol arranged below the central structure 420, A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) according to a second special symbol arranged on the lower right side with respect to the structure 420, and a big winning device 433 arranged below the right starting winning device 432. , 434 (specifically, a lower winning device 433 and an upper winning device 434), a starting device 436 related to a normal symbol arranged above (upstream) the right starting winning device 432, and a game board 400 Upper right Winning device that the winning combination communicating actuating device 435 which is arranged above (upstream side) with respect to 433, regular winning device 439A arranged on both left and right sides of the lower side middle starting winning device 431 B, and a 439B.

  Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the above-described upper middle starting winning device 431A and the like, and corresponds to each switch. The entry of the game ball into the predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle start winning switch (upper middle start winning switch 441A) for detecting a game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 431A, and a middle start winning switch (lower) for detecting a game ball entering the lower middle start winning device 431B. Side starting start winning switch 441B), right starting winning switch 442 for detecting a game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432, lower large winning switch 443 for detecting a game ball having entered the lower large winning device 433, upper winning device. An upper winning switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered the 434, a combination switch 445 that detects a game ball that has entered the combination operating device 435, a start switch 446 that detects a game ball that has entered the starting device 436, and lower. A non-specific passage switch that detects a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage TB (see FIG. 32A) formed inside the special winning device 433. (H) 447, a specific path switch 448 that detects a game ball that has entered a specific path TA (see FIG. 32A) formed inside the lower big prize device 433, and a game ball that has entered the general prize devices 439A and 439B. General winning switches 449A, 449B, etc., which are respectively detected, are provided on the game board 400.

  The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 forms a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area. Each winning device, specifically, the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, the upper winning device 434, and the general winning devices 439A and 439B. The entrance portion of the ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball that has entered each winning opening is guided through a through hole formed in the base 401 to a collection / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. . The game balls that have not entered each of the winning devices are guided to a collection / discharge passage through a discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection and discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). Each prize device may be configured separately from other prize devices, or a device in which two or more prize devices (for example, an upper middle start prize device 431A and a lower middle start prize device 431B) are integrated. The starting device such as the upper middle starting winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball enters. The entrance may be a ball entrance that is released to the game area again without the ball being paid out.

  Each of the upper middle starting winning device 431A and the lower middle starting winning device 431B and the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B according to the first special symbol does not change the probability of a game ball entering them, and enters. The played game ball is guided to the back side of the base 401. Further, the right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof. The mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball does not need to be provided only in the starting device according to the second special symbol. Instead, or in addition, the starting device according to the first special symbol, the general winning device. Any of 439A and 439B or a plurality of them may be provided. Further, the mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid or the like, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operates mechanically.

  The right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 452 for changing the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof by a transition between an entry permitted attitude and an entry prohibited attitude, and a right entry restriction mechanism. 452 (see FIG. 10). The right entry restriction mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces driven by the right entry restriction solenoid 462. When the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition position, the two movable pieces enter the entrance (winning opening). ) Is narrowed (or closed) so that the game ball cannot enter the right starting winning device 432, but when the right approach restricting mechanism 452 is in the approach permitting position, the two movable pieces have their leading ends. By arranging such that the interval between the sets is enlarged, the game ball can enter the right starting winning device 432. The right entry restriction mechanism 452, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to a normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”), enters the right approach In accordance with the drive by the regulating solenoid 462, the state is shifted to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the lower large winning device 433 includes a lower entry restriction mechanism 453 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the interior by a transition between an entry permitted position and an entry prohibited position, and a lower entry restriction. The lower entry control solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 453 and the transition between the non-guidance attitude and the guidance attitude allow the game ball that has entered the lower special winning device 433 to pass through the non-specific passage TB or the specific passage. TA, and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the sorting mechanism 601 to switch the destination to which the game ball is guided by changing the attitude of the sorting mechanism 601 between the entry allowable attitude and the entry prohibited attitude with respect to the specific passage TA. ) Are provided. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry-prohibited position, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower entry device 433. When the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the lower large winning device 433. When the distribution mechanism 601 has a non-guided posture in which the distribution mechanism 601 protrudes forward, the game ball that has entered the lower large winning device 433 is guided to the non-specific passage TB, and a guidance posture in which the distribution mechanism 601 is immersed rearward. In the case of, the vehicle is guided to the specific passage TA. The specific path TA, the non-specific path TB, and the distribution mechanism 601 are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when a game ball enters the specific path TA, a game state advantageous to the player as a privilege is provided. Is given.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper winning award device 434 includes an upper entry restriction mechanism 454 that restricts the entry of a game ball into the entrance permitted position and an entry prohibited position by transition between the entry permitted position and the entry prohibited position, and an upper entry restriction. An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is in the entry-prohibited position, the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434 because the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning opening), but the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is not used. Is in the entry allowable posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 opens the entrance, so that the gaming ball can enter the upper-large winning device 434.

  In addition, as the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of a game ball into the inside such as the right entry control mechanism 452, the winning opening (or entrance opening) of each device is constituted by each mechanism. In response to a change in the posture of the operating member that switches between a special state in which the game ball can enter and a normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and orientation of the operating member differs depending on each posture. I just want it. Further, as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball, such as the right approach restriction mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter to the normal state, and to allow the game ball to enter even in the normal state. In the state, the posture of the operation member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the normal state.

  A game ball can enter the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 when a winning lottery is won. Specifically, a game ball that has entered the upper middle starting winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A or the lower middle starting winning switch 441B. Game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 according to the second special symbol or the first special symbol lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “first special symbol lottery”) is detected by the right start winning switch 442. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”), at least one of the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes an entry allowable posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism 601 shifts to the guidance posture in response to the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the transition to the entry allowable posture of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453, and further after a predetermined time from the transition to the guidance posture. When the switching solenoid 465 stops, the posture returns to the non-guidance posture.

  The winning combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower large winning device 433 and the upper large winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the jackpot lottery, either the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 starts operating on the condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes. For this reason, when a big hit is won, the player can start the special game state at a timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to adopt a configuration in which either the lower large prize device 433 or the upper large prize device 434 starts operating on condition that the gaming ball of the combination operating device 435 passes, instead of or In addition, the configuration may be such that either the lower winning device 433 or the upper winning device 434 starts operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 7, the display board 471 to 473 for displaying the symbol change display and the lottery result, and the display apparatuses 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times the game is held are integrated on the gaming board 400, as shown in FIG. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are partitioned in advance into light emitting areas corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

  Specifically, on the gaming board 400, the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed along with the first special symbol lottery, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 471 relating to a special symbol, and a second symbol for variably displaying the second special symbol in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, or displaying the second special symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 relating to the special symbol, a special symbol reservation display device 476 for displaying the number of hold times of the unit game relating to the first special symbol, and a special symbol hold displaying the number of hold times of the unit game relating to the second special symbol A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are respectively held up to four times. Here, the unit game is one game executed based on one start winning, and is determined based on whether the lottery executed based on one start winning is determined or not, and the lottery is determined based on the winning determination. This refers to a series of games including the start and end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

  When the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is held up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the start winning device 431 is the upper middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) or the lower middle start winning switch. Even if detected by 441B (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432 is detected by the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10). Also, the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is not added.

  Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). . Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (light off, light on, blink) including light emitting colors). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of times of holding by the combination of the light emitting states (off, light, blink) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

  In addition, on the game board 400, a normal symbol display device 473 for changing and displaying a normal symbol or displaying a fixed symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result in accordance with the ordinary symbol lottery, and A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of times the unit game right is held is provided. The right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to four times. If the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the unit game right related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

  The ordinary symbol display device 473 includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Usually, a symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units. In addition, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of times of holding based on a combination of the light emitting states (off, on, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units.

  Also, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner or the decorative symbols are fixedly displayed in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative symbol display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the fixed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variation display of the decorative symbol, more complex and diverse effects are executed than in the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and the fixed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol always start changing at exactly the same timing or stop display as the fixed display. There is no need to set the timing so that the fluctuation is started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the final display is performed at substantially the same timing.

  Further, the game board 400 includes a board light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board light emitting device 490 is associated with the progress of the game based on control by the sub-control board 940. Various light emission effects and status notification by light emission are executed.

  Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. The normal gaming state (hereinafter also abbreviated as “normal gaming state”) is a state in which the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol have a long variable display time (hereinafter also referred to as “non-time saving state”). Corresponding.

  When a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage TA (the internal passage of the lower big winning device 433) during the special game state shifted based on the winning. The game state to be shifted to after the special game state is different depending on whether or not to play. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA during the special game state, the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol and the normal symbol are displayed in a shorter state than the non-hour reduction state (hereinafter referred to as “time saving”). Game state), and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the “low probability state”). (Hereinafter also referred to as "time reduction gaming state"). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage TA during the special game state, it is a time saving state, and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal game state. A transition is made to a gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as a “probable change gaming state”) which is a state (hereinafter, also referred to as a “high probability state”).

  The time-saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), and thereafter returns to the normal game state. In addition, the probability change game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), and thereafter returns to the normal game state.

  The transition between the gaming state and the gaming state is not necessarily required to have the above-described configuration. For example, the high-probability state may be configured to be continued until the next big hit is won, or the gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration further including a gaming state different from each of the above-described gaming states, or a configuration in which a transition between gaming states is performed under a condition different from the above-described conditions.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. On the main control board 920, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, and various fluctuation pattern random numbers relating to a special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated. In the case where the game ball that has entered one of the starting winning devices 431A and 431B according to the first special symbol is detected by one of the middle starting winning switches 441A and 441B (see FIG. 10), the first special symbol starts winning. Becomes At the time of the start winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number and a stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are obtained, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  The unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state, is not the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and is the unit game related to the first special symbol. If no rights are reserved, it will start immediately after storing these random numbers. In addition, even when the special game state is not in progress, the unit game pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game right pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. The unit game based on the starting winning prize starts after the unit gaming related to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current prize is completed. When each random number is acquired based on the winning start of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game based on the random number is all of the units held before the current start winning after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

  Further, the unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning winning of the first special symbol is started after all the unit games related to the second special symbol are completed. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol after the current start winning, the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. The unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are sequentially arranged in the order of the starting winning. May be executed, or the two special symbols may be changed simultaneously instead of being selected.

  If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the winning winning of the first special symbol, a stop symbol (corresponding to the big hit lottery of the first special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number) The type of big hit symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the big hit, for example, the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times that the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture, A plurality of types of big hits are set in accordance with the type of game state such as a game state to be shifted after the special game state (whether or not to shift to the probable change game state), and a big hit symbol is set for each type. If the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the big hit symbol is set as a stop symbol.

  After the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is determined based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of the various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved. The change display time of the symbol is determined, and the change pattern of the decoration symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol (fluctuation effect) on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started. The variable display according to the fixed pattern is continued over the display time, and in the decorative design, the variable display according to the variable pattern is continued over the variable display time. Thereafter, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is definitely displayed, and a symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is definitely displayed as a decorative symbol. The fixed display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined time.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the first special symbol is determined and displayed. In the special gaming state, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the upper large winning device 434 are in the entry permissible attitude a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of big hit. . When a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 443 and 444 or in a predetermined maximum during the allowable entry postures of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 each time. When the permissible entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after the elapse of a predetermined entry prohibition time, either the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 returns to the entry permission posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of big hit.

  Only one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is configured to take an entry allowable attitude during the special game state, and after a predetermined standby time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) One) shifts to the first approach allowable posture in ()). In addition, the special game state ends when a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses after returning to the final entry prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time elapses thereafter (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving game state or the probable change game state.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432 according to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 442, a second special symbol is started. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control of the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is obtained, and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decoration symbol, the execution of the variation display, and the transition control of the game state are executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol. Is done.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, a winning random number related to a normal symbol is obtained unless the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol is not being performed, the unit game relating to the acquired ordinary symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol is being performed, the unit game relating to the acquired ordinary symbol is started after the completion of the unit game based on the acquired unit game right relating to the ordinary symbol.

  In a unit game related to a normal symbol, it is determined whether or not a winning has been made based on the value of a winning random number. When the winning is made, a predetermined winning symbol is set as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when no winning is made in the ordinary symbol lottery, a predetermined lost symbol is set as a stopped symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-hour reduction state, the fluctuation display in a fixed pattern is continued for a predetermined fluctuation display time, and in the time reduction state. The variable display in a fixed pattern is continued for a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With a lapse of a predetermined time according to the gaming state, a stop symbol related to a normal symbol is fixedly displayed over a certain period of time.

  When the stop symbol related to the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the right entry restricting mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry allowable attitude at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, in a case of winning in the non-time-saving state (the normal game state and the special game state), the right start winning device 432 permits the entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 second). When the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state, the predetermined maximum allowable time is longer (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds). ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to enter the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right starting winning switch 442, the right approach restricting mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibiting posture without waiting for the elapse of the maximum allowable time. In addition, even if the number of transitions to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right starting winning device 432 in the unit game relating to the current ordinary symbol ends.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, the player must first win in the ordinary symbol lottery, and further, the game ball enters the right-start prize device 432 in a permissible entry state of the right-start prize device 432 based on the winning. Must. The winning probability for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry-permitted state of the right starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely shorter than the staying time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) in the time saving state, so that the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state. Is much smaller than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. Conversely, in a time-saving state such as a time-saving game state or a probable change game state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery. .

  Therefore, the player wins the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, plays a game aiming at the transition to the certain change game state by causing the game ball to enter the specific passage TA. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probable change game state, the game is aimed at winning the big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

  Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 at the center of the game area where the game ball flows down, and a game method (left-handed game) in which the game ball flows mainly from the left side of the central structure 420 ) And a game technique (right-handed game technique) in which a game ball flows down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420. In the normal gaming state, the player plays a game by a left-handed gaming technique, and in the time-saving gaming state and the probable changing gaming state, plays a game by a right-handed gaming technique. In addition, since the lower large winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 are arranged on the right side of the central structure 420, the game is performed by the right-handed gaming technique even in the special gaming state.

  Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching another member or device to the base 501. The base 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported on the intermediate block 103 so as to be openable and closable.

  The rear block 104 is a game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game balls, and rectifies the game balls (for example, in one row) continuously on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and aligns them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball aligning portion, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding portion for guiding game balls flowing from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and payout of game balls on a downstream side of the case rail 530 A payout device 540 for renting out game balls, and guidance as a ball guiding portion for guiding game balls flowing out of the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guidance passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 that controls payout of game balls by the payout device 540 and lending of game balls, and an external power source. A function as a power supply means for converting the power into a predetermined voltage required by the kind of device or the like and outputting the same, and controlling the ejection of game balls based on a firing operation on the firing operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. A power supply / launch control device 570 having a function as a launch control means, a payout control device 560, a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1), and a card unit (not shown) arranged beside the pachinko machine 100 And a relay device 950 that relays a signal between the two.

  The base 501 is integrally formed of a resin (for example, an ABS resin), and includes a base 502 corresponding to a front portion and a protective cover 503 located behind the base 502. The base portion 502 has an upper portion formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower portion formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. It has a function as an attached part to be attached.

  The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. The protective cover portion 503 does not cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the rear surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected or confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370. The size is set so as to form a window for exposing to the window. A large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving the heat dissipation of the heat generated by the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed on the back surface of the protective cover 503.

  The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container opened upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island equipment are sequentially supplied to one end in the longitudinal direction. An opening (not shown) is formed in one end of the game ball tank 510 in the longitudinal direction different from the side on which the game balls are supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. In addition, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). . In addition, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap therewith, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

  The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 that forms a substantially gutter-shaped game ball passage having a width through which the game balls pass in a line, and a height gradually increasing as an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. And a rectifying member 522 for rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage having a top surface portion whose height is lowered from a vertically overlapped height to a one-stage height. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

  The case rail 530 is formed vertically long so as to be continuous below the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. On the case rail 530, the game ball is curved left and right so as not to flow vigorously and continues downward. A stored ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) for detecting a broken ball is attached to a middle portion of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The stored ball switch 591 detects an out-of-ball state in which game balls are not normally replenished in the case rail 530 due to clogging of the ball on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof.

  The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for sending out game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as driving means for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout count switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. Passing of the released game balls through the ball path is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of paid out game balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / fire control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap the lower rear surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be located at the lower rear side of the rear block 104. Have been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / firing control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

  The dispensing control device 560 includes a dispensing control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that accommodates the dispensing control board 930. It is housed inside a substrate case sealed so as not to be opened.

  The power / emission control device 570 includes a power / emission control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power / emission control board 900. The power / emission control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. Is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. In FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

  The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each unit of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device in response to operation of the launch operation device 250. A launch control unit 902 that controls the driving of the 330 and a signal relay unit 903 that relays an initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and a ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249 are provided.

  The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various powers from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 is power of a driving voltage (for example, 12 VDC) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. For example, power of a control voltage (for example, 5 volts DC), power of a backup voltage for retaining the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

  The power supply unit 901 supplies various types of power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power of the internal power, the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the power supply monitoring board 910. The power of the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. To the payout control board 930, power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with power of the driving voltage and the control voltage. The emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903 are supplied with electric power of a driving voltage and a control voltage.

  A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in an off state, taking in of external power is stopped. The pachinko machine is turned off by turning off the power switch 909, or by removing a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 from the external power supply outlet (not shown) via the power switch 909. A state in which the supply of power to the inside of the device 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

  The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after shifting to the power failure state. Accordingly, the main control board 920 can save the state so as to return to the current control state and end the control.

  The launch control unit 902 controls the driving of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The operation of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 is permitted when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping the firing is provided. The firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in an ON state to the main control board 920 on condition that the operation is not performed. The main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feeding solenoid 332 based on the ball feeding control signal in the ON state, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the firing solenoid control signal in the ON state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let it. As a result, game balls are sequentially fired from the firing device 330 with an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252).

  The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The main control board 920 initializes the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to receiving the ON-state initialization signal. Note that the initialization switch 907 does not necessarily need to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920. The configuration may be such that the initialization switch 907 is accommodated in the board case 371, so that an illegal signal input aimed at a section where a signal is transmitted can be suppressed.

  In addition, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the low-speed payout signal outputs the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. The payout speed of the game balls from the device 540 is reduced. In addition, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the high-speed payout signal controls the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

  The power supply monitoring board 910 monitors a power supply state from the power supply / emission control board 900, and supplies power and transmits various signals between the power supply / emission control board 900 and the main control board 920. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. If the state in which the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and an on-state power failure signal is output to main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the shift to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

  The main control board 920 controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100 as a whole. On the main control board 920, an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) storing various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily stored when executing the control programs. And the like (not shown) for storing the same. Various other circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. I have. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by power supply of a backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after shifting to a power failure state.

  The payout control board 930 controls the operation of paying out game balls by the payout device 540 in accordance with an instruction from the main control board 920 and the operation of renting out game balls by the payout device 540 in accordance with the operation of the game ball lending device 290. Like the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. Various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is provided with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting information communication with another device, and for example, bidirectional information input / output communication with the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 is possible. Are connected to the open / close detection switches 108 and 109, the stored ball switch 591 and the payout counting switch 592 so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is connected. Note that the RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function to maintain internal data for a certain period in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920 Unlike this, a configuration in which the internal data is not maintained in the power failure state may be adopted.

  The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various audio devices, and the like based on instructions from the main control substrate 920. The sub-control board 940 is provided with an input / output port as a connecting means for connecting information communication with another device. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , And the input operation device 260 are connected so that information can be communicated in both directions, and the decorative symbol display device 479 and the like are connected so that only one-way information output communication is possible.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 is roughly divided into a main processing started upon recovery from a power failure state and a main processing that is interrupted periodically (in the present embodiment at a period of 2 ms (milliseconds)). Timer interrupt processing.

  First, a main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 11).

  In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initialization processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 for prohibiting the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) and the big hit symbol random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) for the special symbol, and the normal symbol The random number initial value updating process S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (part of the area of the RAM), and first to fourth variation type counters for determining a variation time, a variation pattern, and the like. Variation counter update processing S1022 for updating the value of the counter (partial area of the RAM), and interruption permission processing S for permitting an interrupt 023 and is repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt permitting process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permitting process S1023.

  In a series of control start processing, a program start processing S1001 for setting an initial value to a stack pointer (a partial area of the RAM) for controlling execution of a program, an interrupt mode setting processing S1002 for setting an interrupt mode, and a payout control board A start-up standby process S1003 for waiting for a predetermined time until the 930 and the sub-control board 940 and the like start up is executed.

  After the start-up standby process S1003, a process S1004 for determining the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power / emission control board 900, a process S1005 for determining the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM), and saving An information storage state determination process S1007 is performed, and it is determined whether or not the stored information in the RAM is to be deleted based on the determination results. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a partial area of the RAM that has been updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and The value of a counter related to the unit game in the middle, the value of the counter stored by the start winning, and the like are exemplified.

  The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) with the transition to the previous power failure state. ), It is determined whether or not the exclusive OR of the checksum value calculated in (2) with the RAM determination value, which is a 2's complement, is “0” (determination processing S1007). It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

  When the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), when the power outage information is not the predetermined power outage value indicating that the storage information has been saved and ended at the time of transition to the power outage state (S1005: N), or stored. If the information is not normally stored (S1007: N), a RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the information stored in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y), or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed, the hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920 A ware initialization process S1009 is executed.

  After the hardware initialization process S1009, a process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is performed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), a RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the held information, and a return command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the return of the held information in the RAM return setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 returns to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

  On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized without restoring the held information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. Is performed (initialization command output processing S1014).

  In the RAM return setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as an improper detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state. Even if the error has occurred, all of those error states are released. Also, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command. A predetermined initialization process is also performed in each of.

  After the initialization of the RAM according to the situation at the time of start-up (determination processing S1004 to initialization command output processing S1014), if the condition device was activated at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation processing S1015, the operation states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and the processing corresponding to the game state at the time of the power outage state is executed on the sub control board 940. You.

  After the special game state return preparation processing S1015, it is determined whether or not the time reduction state flag is set to determine whether the state is the time reduction state or the non-time reduction state (determination processing S1016). In this case (S1016: Y), a time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), a non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output processing S1018). Thereafter, the value of the winning random number counter (part of the RAM) relating to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting processing S1019).

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

  In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than the timer interrupt are prohibited. Thereafter, a power outage monitoring process S1202 to an external information output process S1221 relating to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various kinds of injustices (S1207: Y), the control signal output processing S1208 to the external information output processing S1221 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. Hereinafter, various main processes will be described individually.

  In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected all three times, it is determined that the power failure state is present. If it is not determined in this determination that a power failure has occurred, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the power outage monitoring process S1202 that the power is out, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM return setting processing S1011 or the RAM initialization processing S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. In addition, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and a two's complement of the checksum value is set as a RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop in which substantial control such as progress of the game and monitoring of various sensors is not performed, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. You. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

  In the random number updating process S1203, the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. When the value of the winning random number counter according to the above is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). However, if the value after the change is the same value as the cyclic initial value for the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. , And the cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

  The big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the ordinary symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter for the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and a plurality of counters are configured to be updated asynchronously. Refers to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter for the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol have the same value range, the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, The winning random number counter related to the ordinary symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol have the same value range.

  In the random number initial value update processing S1204, the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter for the ordinary symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the special value is changed. If the value of the winning random number initial value counter for the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol, the random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is the same except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as the value counter.

  In the variation counter updating process S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation time, the variation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “187”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the first variation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). The second to fourth variation type counters are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. Is done.

  In addition, each winning random number counter, big hit symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, and each variation type counter related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol need not necessarily have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter is used as another configuration. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a fixed initial value is updated without using an initial value counter, or a configuration in which a random number generation IC is used without using a program and a value is referred to as necessary. .

  In the game stop determination processing S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, the information is updated to the game stop value, and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, when the fraud detection information is not the fraud detection value or is already the game stop value, the game stop determination processing S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when various frauds are detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. In the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped based on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

  In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 for the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 for the second special symbol, and the normal symbol display device 472 A signal for controlling various notification devices such as the symbol display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approaching solenoid 462, a lower approaching solenoid 463, an upward approaching solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are provided. A control signal is output.

  In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switches 441A and 441B, the right start winning switch 442, the lower large winning switch 443, the upper large winning switch 444, the combination operating switch 445, the start switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, and the specific The signal state from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B is read, and a change in the detection state of the game ball by various switches is detected.

  Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read twice into the input buffer (part of the RAM) at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. Each time, a signal state read first (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and a signal state read second (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) Based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”), a change in the detection state of various switches is detected. Then, when the previous detection state is the OFF state, the first signal state is the ON state, and when the second signal state is the ON state, it is determined that each switch has transitioned to the ON state. Then, a detection flag (a partial area of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. Note that, as described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when it is started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

  In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of the RAM) used for displaying special symbols and ordinary symbols in a variable manner, controlling each game state, and monitoring for irregularities are updated.

  In the fraud detection processing S1211, a fraudulent act of forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices is detected. Specifically, the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 are forcibly moved to the approach allowable posture, and the game balls are moved to the specific passage TA of the lower winning device 433 by vibration. Guidance, induction of compulsory malfunction of the right starting winning device 432, the lower winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 by radio waves, guidance of a game ball to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, upper middle starting winning device 431A. A situation where it is highly probable that an illegal act such as guiding a game ball to the lower middle starting winning device 431B, the right starting winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, and the upper winning device 434 at abnormal timing has been performed. Is detected.

  In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on detection of a game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the upper middle starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the lower middle starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). , The middle start winning counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the first payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated. When the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. In addition, when the lower special winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower special winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the upper special winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10). When the upper winning switch detection flag is set based on the above, the big winning counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (a predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

  In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

  In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is set to the intermediate block. It is detected whether 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed. Also, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is compared with the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is closed or not.

  In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. Note that the sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

  In the payout signal output processing S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. Note that the first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated in accordance with the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by one each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and decremented by one each time a winning ball command based on the winning is set. Each time the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number (for example, three) of game balls corresponding to the winning (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed), the main control board 920 receives a prize. In a situation where a ball command is requested and payout of prize balls continues, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a winning (for example, 13) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and outputs a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter to the payout control board. When 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the award ball command.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, the control of holding the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the unit game right related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is executed, and when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower large winning device. The operation control of the 433 and the upper winning device 434 is further executed.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, the control of holding the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the holding control of the unit game right related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol holding display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is executed. The operation of the 433 and the upper winning device 434 is further controlled.

  In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the unit game right related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol, the operation control of the ordinary symbol display device 473 relating to the ordinary symbol is executed, and when the ordinary symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right starting winning device 432 is further executed. .

  In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol reservation display device 477 and the like relating to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

  In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Occurrence mode of reach effect in probable play state>
The manner in which the reach effect is generated in the probable change game state and matters related thereto will be described together in detail. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a unit game in which a reach display of a decorative symbol is definitely or selectively generated in the probable game state, and FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a transition of an internal state in the probable game state. FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the distribution of unit games that definitely or selectively generate reach display of decorative symbols in the probable game state, and FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the reach production in the probable change game state.

  First, the transition state of the gaming state will be described. In the normal game state, a game is performed with the aim of causing the game ball to enter the upper middle start winning device 431A or the lower middle start winning device 431B. Then, the first special symbol lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 431A or the lower middle starting winning device 431B, and if a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the lower The special game state in which the big winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 operate is established. In this special game state, when a game ball enters a specific passage TA (see FIG. 32A) formed inside the lower big prize winning device 433, a predetermined number of unit games (this embodiment) are performed after the special game state. In the case where the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, a predetermined number of times (40 times, 60 times or 80 times in the present embodiment) after the special game state. It becomes a time-saving game state throughout the game. In addition, in the probable change game state or the time saving game state, a game is performed with the aim of causing the right starting winning device 432 to enter a game ball. Then, based on the game ball entering the right starting winning device 432, the second special symbol lottery is performed, and before the predetermined number of unit games is completed, if a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, As in the case where the first special symbol lottery is won, the game is changed to the certain-variable game state or the time-saving game state through the special game state. In addition, when the predetermined number of unit games have been completed in the probable change game state or the time saving game state, the game returns to the normal game state.

  Next, the control in the case of winning a big hit by the first special symbol lottery will be described. When the big hit is won by the first special symbol lottery, the mode of the special game state is determined based on the value acquired from the big hit symbol random number counter. Specifically, when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is “0” to “181”, a short-time (six rounds in this embodiment) special game state with a small number of continuous rounds is set. In the case of "182" to "479", a special game state of a long term (16 rounds in this embodiment) with a large number of continuous rounds is set.

  In addition, a stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is determined as a result of the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is identified by an 8-bit value, and is determined by a predetermined calculation based on a value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter. Each bit of the 8-bit value for identifying the stop symbol is associated with each light-emitting unit of the symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol composed of eight light-emitting units, and the stop symbol is a bit value. Is displayed by turning on the light emitting unit when is "1" and turning off the light when it is "0".

  Further, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 is determined based on the values acquired from the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the jackpot symbol relating to the decorative symbol is finally displayed via the reach display. In addition, as a variation pattern of the decorative symbol when the jackpot is not won, if roughly classified, a pattern in which a lost symbol relating to the decorative symbol is finally displayed without going through the reach display (hereinafter, “losing symbol”). There is also a pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as a “reach loss pattern”) that passes through the reach display but finally displays a lost symbol related to a decorative symbol.

  After that, the special game state is started, and the lower winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 operate appropriately. In this special game state, when a game ball enters a specific passage TA (see FIG. 32A) formed inside the lower big prize winning device 433 and the game ball is detected by the specific passage switch 448, the special ball is detected. After the gaming state, the game state is changed to a certain-variable gaming state over 100 unit games. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, a predetermined number of times (40 times, 60 times or 80 times in the present embodiment) after the special gaming state. (Time) over the unit game. In the long special game state in which the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter is “240” to “479”, if the launch of the game ball by right-handing is continued, the game ball is moved to the specific path TA. Can be entered, and after the special game state, the game state is changed to the certain change game state. On the other hand, if the value is any other value, the game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA even if the launch of the game ball by right-handing is continued, and the time-saving game state is set after the special game state.

  At the time of transition from the special game state to the probable change game state, based on the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter, a transition pattern of the internal game state which controls the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the probable change game state after the special game state is identified. Is determined (pattern number). Specifically, when the value obtained from the jackpot symbol random number counter is “240” to “359” as the value for identifying the transition pattern, “1” to “120” are set, respectively. Also in the case of “360” to “479”, “1” to “120” are set, respectively. As a result, various transition patterns are evenly selected. In the time-saving game state (the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter is “0” to “239”), a transition pattern different from that in the case of the probable change game state is selected.

  Next, the control in the case of winning a big hit by the second special symbol lottery will be described. When the big hit is won by the second special symbol lottery, the mode of the special game state is determined based on the value acquired from the big hit symbol random number counter. Specifically, when the value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter is “0” to “239”, the special game state of a short term (six rounds in this embodiment) with a small number of continuous rounds is set, Is "240" to "479", a special game state of a long term (16 rounds in this embodiment) with a large number of continuous rounds is set.

  In addition, a stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is determined as a lottery result of the second special symbol lottery. The stop symbol related to the second special symbol is identified by an 8-bit value, as in the case of the stop symbol related to the first special symbol, and is determined by a predetermined calculation based on a value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter. Is done. Further, similarly to the case of the stop symbol according to the first special symbol, each bit of the 8-bit value for identifying the stop symbol according to the second special symbol is related to the second special symbol constituted by eight light emitting units. The stop symbol is associated with each light emitting unit of the symbol display device 472, and the stop symbol is displayed by turning on the light emitting unit when the bit value is “1” and turning off the light when the bit value is “0”. .

  Further, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 479 is determined based on the values acquired from the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 479, the jackpot symbol relating to the decorative symbol is finally displayed via the reach display.

  Thereafter, the special game state is started, and the upper winning device 434 and the lower winning device 433 operate appropriately. In this special game state, similarly to the special game state relating to the first special symbol, a game ball enters a specific passage TA (see FIG. 32 (A)) formed inside the lower big winning device 433, and the game is performed. When the ball is detected by the specific path switch 448, the game state is changed to the certain-variable game state over 100 unit games after the special game state, and if the game ball does not enter the specific path TA, The time saving game state is set over 40, 60, or 80 unit games according to the stop symbol of the second special symbol. However, unlike the special game state related to the first special symbol, when the launch of the game ball by right-handed is continued, the game ball can enter the specific passage TA regardless of the value of the big hit symbol random number counter. After the special game state, the game state is changed to the certain change game state. At the time of transition from the special game state to the probability change game state or the time saving game state, based on the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter, the transition of the internal game state which controls the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the probability change game state after the special game state Is determined. Specifically, when the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter is “0” to “479” as the value for identifying the transition pattern, four values are set to “1” to “120”. For example, when the values acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter are “0”, “120”, “240”, and “360”, the value for identifying the transition pattern is set to “1”.

  Next, a game in the probable change game state will be described. The probable change game state is internally further divided into five types of internal game states, and the transition patterns are the probable change state A, the probable change state B, the probable change state C, and the probable change state D as shown in FIG. And a probable change state E. Each of the probable change state A to the probable change state E is common in that, in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery), a jackpot is randomly selected with a higher probability than in the normal game state or the time reduction game state. The effect selection mode on the decorative symbol display device 479 is different. In the probable change state A, one loss pattern is selected as a fluctuation pattern from a plurality of types of loss patterns. In the probable change state B, one reach loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach loss patterns as a fluctuation pattern. In the probability change state C, one reach loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of reach loss patterns at a rate of 50%, and one loss pattern is selected from a plurality of types of loss patterns at a rate of 50%. In the probable change state D, a loss pattern is selected as a fluctuating pattern similarly to the probable change state A, and a lottery is performed on whether or not to shift to a specific mode display. In the probable change state E, as in the probable change state A, a loss pattern is selected as a fluctuation pattern, and a process for terminating the probable change game state is executed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, based on a transition pattern selected from 120 types of transition patterns (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the main control board 920), the variation of the reach loss pattern is determined deterministically. The remaining number of unit games for designating unit games to be generated (“Fixed Reach Generation Remaining Unit Games Number” in the figure) and the remainder for designating unit games for selectively generating fluctuations in reach loss patterns by lottery The number of unit games (“unit number of lottery reach remaining units” in the figure) is set. As a result, the internal game state in the specific game state is, as shown in FIG. 14, in the unit game from the first unit game to the unit game in which the fluctuation of the reach loss pattern occurs deterministically, the probability state A ( Control corresponding to “A” in the figure) is executed. In addition, in a unit game in which the fluctuation of the reach loss pattern occurs deterministically (hereinafter also referred to as “determined reach generating unit game”), control according to the probability change state B (simply abbreviated as “B” in the figure) is executed. You. Further, in the unit game from after the unit game in which the change of the reach loss pattern occurs definitely to before the unit game in which the change of the reach loss pattern occurs selectively, the probability change state A is set again. In addition, in a unit game in which a change in the reach loss pattern occurs selectively (hereinafter, also referred to as a “lottery-reach occurrence unit game”), control according to the probability change state C (abbreviated simply as “C” in the figure) is executed. You. In addition, in the unit game from after the unit game in which the reach loss pattern occurs selectively to before the last unit game, a control corresponding to the probability change state D (simply abbreviated as “D” in the figure) is executed. Further, in the last unit game, control according to the probability change state E (simply abbreviated as “E” in the figure) is executed.

  Here, a description will be given of an effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 479 in the probability change game state. In the probable changing game state, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 includes, as shown in FIG. 17, a symbol display area 481 for displaying a decorative symbol, and a remaining number indicating the remaining unit game number in the probable changing game state. A display area 482 is formed. For example, in the forty-fifth unit game in the probable change game state, “55” is displayed as the remaining unit game number. Further, a reach-related information display area 483 that represents the type of the reach effect and indirectly indicates the number of occurrences of the reach effect is formed. Specifically, in the reach-related information display area 483, a left display portion 483L corresponding to a reach effect by the first character having a low jackpot expectation and a right display portion corresponding to a reach effect by the second character having a high jackpot expectation. 483R and a central display section 483M corresponding to the reach effect by the third character whose big hit is determined. Until the first reach effect occurs, each of the left display unit 483L, the right display unit 483R, and the center display unit 483M is displayed brightly.

  The second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery) does not win a big hit from the first unit game to the unit game before the fixed reach generating unit game, and does not win a big hit in the fixed reach generating unit game. In this case, the first reach display of the decorative symbol is performed in the symbol display area 481, and the lost symbol is finally determined and displayed. Along with the reach display, one of the reach effect by the first character and the reach effect by the second character is selected, and the selected reach effect is executed. Further, when the reach effect by the first character is selected, the left display unit 483L darkens, while when the reach effect by the second character is selected, the right display unit 483R darkens. In addition, when the big hit is not won, the reach effect by the third character does not occur.

  Furthermore, when reaching the lottery reach generation unit game without winning a big hit and in the lottery reach generation unit game without winning the big hit, when the reach generation lottery is won, the symbol display area 481 is displayed. The reach display of the second decorative symbol is performed, and the lost symbol is finally displayed. Along with this reach display, a reach effect is generated by a character different from the character selected in the first reach display, and a right display section 483R corresponding to the reach effect by the character selected in the current reach display. Alternatively, the left display portion 483L darkens. On the other hand, in the lottery reach generation unit game, when the reach generation lottery is not won, the reach display of the second decorative symbol is not generated in the symbol display area 481, and the reach effect is not executed. After that, if the player reaches the final unit game without winning a jackpot and does not win the jackpot in the final unit game, no further reach indication will be generated and a reach effect will be executed. Nor.

  When a big hit is won in the unit game from the first unit game to the confirmed reach generating unit game, the first reach display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display area 481, and finally, the big hit symbol is displayed. Confirmed display. In the unit game that has won the big hit, a reach effect by the first character, a reach effect by the second character, or a reach effect by the third character is selected. In addition, when a big hit is won in the unit game from the confirmed reach generating unit game to the lottery reach generating unit game, the second reach display is executed, and finally the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. In the unit game that has won the jackpot, a reach effect by a character different from the selected character or a reach effect by a third character is executed with the first reach display. In addition, when a jackpot is won in a unit game from the lottery reach generation unit game to the last unit game, if the reach display is executed in the lottery reach generation unit game in the symbol display area 481, the third is performed. The second reach display is executed. On the other hand, if the reach effect is not executed in the lottery reach generation unit game, the second reach display is executed, and finally the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. In the unit game that has won the jackpot, the reach effect by the third character is always executed in the case of the third reach display, and the first decoration in the case of the second reach display. A reach effect by a character not selected in the symbol reach display or a reach effect by the third character is executed.

  Here, the transition pattern will be described. In each probable change game state, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in each unit game is determined according to a transition pattern selected from 120 types of transition patterns in which the combination of the fixed reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game are different.

  In each transition pattern, as shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15 (A), the determined reach generation unit game has a remaining unit game number in the range of “87” to “46” and “77”, Assigned to unit games other than “66”, “64”, “50” and “55”. The fixed reach generation unit game is frequently assigned to a unit game whose remaining unit game number is near “77”. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 15B, the lottery reach occurrence unit game has the remaining unit game number in the range of “68” to “13” and “67”, “66”. , "64", "62", "60", "59", "56", "55", "50", "45", "44", "36", "34", "33", " It is assigned to unit games other than "23" and "22". Therefore, in the tenth unit game in which the remaining unit game number is “90” from the first unit game in which the remaining unit game number is “99”, the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery) is performed. When the jackpot has not been won, the reach display of the decorative symbol is not performed in the symbol display area 481. Conversely, when the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs in those unit games, it is determined that the big hit has been won. Similarly, from the 91st unit game in which the remaining unit game number is “9”, in the last unit game in which the remaining unit game number is “0”, if the jackpot has not been won, the symbol display is performed. The reach display of the decorative symbols is not performed in the area 481, and when the reach display of the decorative symbols occurs in those unit games, it is determined that the big hit has been won. Also, the twelfth and twenty-third times the remaining unit game numbers are “88”, “77”, “66”, “55”, “44”, “33”, “22”, and “11” (doubled). In the unit games, the 34th, the 44th, the 56th, the 67th, the 78th and the 88th unit games, if a big hit has not been won, the reach display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 481. Is not performed, and when the reach display of the decorative symbols occurs in those unit games, it is determined that the big hit has been won.

  In each transition pattern, as shown in FIG. 13, at least 10 times (in the present embodiment, at least 10 times: pattern 113) of unit games are performed after the fixed reach generating unit game and before the lottery reach generating unit game. Intervening. Similarly, at least 10 (in this embodiment, at least 12 times: patterns 55, 77, and 105) unit games are interposed between the final reach generating unit game and the last unit game. Therefore, in the unit game of 10 or less after the unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol has occurred, if the jackpot has not been won, the reach display of the decorative symbol is not performed in the symbol display area 481. When the reach display of the decorative symbols occurs in those unit games, it is determined that the big hit has been won. In addition, since the lottery reach generation unit game is not allocated to the 33rd, 44th, 55th, 66th, 77th and 88th unit games, in those unit games, When the jackpot has not been won, the second decorative symbol reach display is not performed in the symbol display area 481, and when the second decorative symbol reach display occurs in those unit games. Is determined to have won the jackpot. Note that the number of unit games from the start of the probable game state is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, but can be confirmed by a data display device (not shown) provided along with the pachinko machine 100.

  In each transition pattern, a predetermined unit game, for example, a unit game in which the number of unit games remaining and the number of unit games from the start of the probable changing game state are “36” representing the name (thumb) of the third character, If the jackpot has not been won in the second special symbol lottery (or the first special symbol lottery), the reach display of the decorative symbol is not performed in the symbol display area 481.

  Further, in the 120 types of transition patterns, as shown in FIG. 15 (A), the fixed reach generation unit game is frequently assigned to a nearby unit game whose remaining unit game number is “77”. , The lower the frequency as the number of unit games departs from “77”. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree in the unit game in which the first decorative symbol reach display has occurred is low in the unit game in which the remaining unit game number is near “77”, and as the remaining unit game number moves away from “77”, Get higher. This makes it possible to change the jackpot expectation when the first decorative symbol reach display is generated for each remaining unit number of games. Also, as shown in FIG. 15B, the lottery reach occurrence unit game is a unit game in the vicinity where the remaining unit game number is “55”, “44” or “33” (particularly “33”). Assigned frequently. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree in the unit game in which the reach display of the second decorative symbol has occurred is low in the unit game in which the remaining unit game number is near “55”, “44” or “33”, and the remaining unit game is As the number moves away from “55” to the smaller side, it increases and approaches the intermediate value between “55” and “44” (“49”) or the intermediate value between “44” and “33” (“39”). It increases as the number of remaining unit games increases from "55" to the larger side. As a result, it is possible to change the jackpot expectation degree when the second decorative symbol reach display is generated, with approximately five unit games as a cycle.

  In addition, in the 120 types of transition patterns, as shown in FIG. 16, the allocation range of the fixed reach generation unit game and the allocation range of the lottery reach generation unit game partially overlap, and the fixed reach generation unit game and Except for a predetermined unit game (a unit game in which the number of remaining unit games is a number corresponding to a slot or a character), the lottery reach occurrence unit game is a probable changing game state in which the number of remaining unit games is "87" to "46". Are allocated almost equally in a predetermined range in the first half of the game, and are also allocated substantially equally in a predetermined range in the second half of the certainty-variable game state in which the remaining unit game numbers are "46" to "13". However, since the display ratio of the decorative design in the lottery reach generation unit game is 1/2, the frequency of the reach display of the decorative symbol in the second half is approximately the frequency of the reach display of the decorative symbol in the first half. It becomes 1/2. Therefore, in each probable game state, in the unit games over a wide range of the remaining unit game numbers "87" to "13", the reach display of the decorative symbols is generated almost uniformly.

  Further, the 120 types of transition patterns are constituted by a plurality of combinations of transition patterns in which the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the confirmed reach generating unit game is the same and the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the lottery reach generating unit game is different. ing. Therefore, it is not easy to estimate a unit game in which the first reach display of the second decorative symbol may occur due to the occurrence of the first reach display of the decorative symbol.

  In the above-described pachinko machine 100, the unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol is definitely generated in each transition pattern is defined. The display always occurs once. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation where even the reach display of the decorative pattern does not occur in the probable change game state, such as a case where the occurrence of the reach display is determined by lottery for each unit game, Can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, in each transition pattern, one unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol is definitely generated and one unit game in which the reach display of the decorative symbol is selectively generated. Are also defined so that the reach display of the decorative symbol is not generated except for those unit games. Therefore, if a reach display of the third decorative symbol occurs within the unit game of 100 times in the probable game state, a big hit will always occur. However, as the game in the probable game state progresses, even if the player does not win the big hit, the decoration is performed. Since the number of reach displays (one or two) of the symbol always increases, the sense of expectation of the big hit can be amplified as the game progresses. As a result, it is possible to further improve the playability in the probable change game state.

  Furthermore, in the case of the above-described pachinko machine 100, the period in which the change of the losing reach pattern is controlled by the transition pattern is limited to 100 unit games, and the maximum number of times that the change of the losing reach pattern is selected in the period is selected. Is limited to two times. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation for a different big hit depending on the combination of the remaining unit game number in the probability-variable game state and the number of occurrences of the reach display.

  Furthermore, in the case of the above-described pachinko machine 100, in each transition pattern, the fixed reach generation unit game and the lottery reach generation unit game can be easily set to a desired unit game, and the reach display is deterministically or desirably performed in the desired unit game. It can be generated selectively. In all the transition patterns, a predetermined unit game, for example, a unit game whose number is equal to or less than the first predetermined number, a unit game whose number is equal to or less than the last predetermined number, and a unit in which the number of remaining unit games is a number or the like attributed to a slot or a character By not assigning the fixed reach generating unit game and the lottery reach generating unit game to the unit game of a predetermined number or less from the game, the fixed reach generating unit game or the lottery reach generating unit game, the reach display of the decorative symbol in the predetermined unit game If it occurs, it can be simply set so as to always be a big hit. As a result, it is possible to further improve the playability in the probable change game state.

  Furthermore, in the case of the above-described pachinko machine 100, in all the transition patterns, the fixed reach generation unit game is allocated so as to have a predetermined distribution (see FIG. 15A), and the first reach display of the decorative pattern is performed. It is possible to prevent a monotonous game when the reach display of the decorative symbol occurs because the expectation degree of the big hit in the case of the occurrence of is changed. Also, in all the transition patterns, the lottery reach generating unit games are allocated so as to have a predetermined distribution (see FIG. 15B), and the expectation degree of the big hit when the second decorative symbol reach display occurs. Is changed, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous when the second decorative symbol reach display occurs. As a result, it is possible to further improve the playability in the probable change game state.

  Further, in the case of the above-described pachinko machine 100, in all transition patterns, the reach display of the decorative symbol is in the predetermined range of the first half of the gaming state in the gaming state (the number of remaining unit games is "87" to "46"). Occurs approximately evenly, and approximately uniformly occurs in a unit game in a predetermined range (the remaining unit number of games is "46" to "13") in the second half of the probable variation game state that is continuous with the predetermined range in the first half. As a result, the fixed reach generating unit game and the lottery reach generating unit game are allocated (see FIG. 16). Therefore, in most ranges of the probable change game state (the number of remaining unit games is “87” to “13”), it is possible to generate the reach display as if a lot display was selected in each unit game. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for a big hit. In addition, when the unit game reach display of the predetermined range of the first half of the unit game and the reach display of the unit game within the predetermined range of the second half of the unit are displayed, the expectation degree of the big hit is changed. Can be prevented from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to further improve the playability in the probable change game state.

  Further, a predetermined number of remaining unit games corresponding to the confirmed reach generating unit game is the same, and a transition pattern in which the number of remaining unit games corresponding to the lottery reach generating unit game is different is one set. A plurality of pattern sets are set. Therefore, based on the unit game in which the first decorative symbol reach display has occurred, the unit game in which the second decorative symbol reach display may occur cannot be easily estimated, and the reach display is always performed. The game can be continued while expecting the occurrence of. As a result, it is possible to further improve the playability in the probable change game state.

<Special symbol display mode>
Stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, their display modes, and matters related thereto will be described in detail together. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol-related process S1217 in the main control interrupt process. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol change start process S1303 in the special symbol change process S1217, and FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol generation process S1404 in the special symbol change start process S1303.

  The stop symbol identification value for identifying the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the stop symbol of the second special symbol is a predetermined calculation based on the symbol identification value determined according to the big hit symbol random number value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter. If the operation result is out of the predetermined value range, the value is set to the generated value. On the other hand, if the operation result is in the predetermined value range, the generated value is set. Is set to a predetermined value associated with the value. The control for determining the stop symbol identification value based on the acquired value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter is performed by the special symbol change process S1303 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) of the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIGS. 12 and 18). ) Is realized by the winning determination processing S1403 (see FIG. 19) and the stop symbol generation processing S1404 (see FIGS. 19 and 20).

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, as shown in FIG. 18, in addition to the special symbol change start process S1303, the upper middle start winning device 431A (see FIG. 7) and the lower middle start winning device 431B (see FIG. 7). )), A start winning process S1301 for executing control related to the first special symbol lottery accompanying the entry of the game ball into the right start winning device 432 (see FIG. 7). Is also performed.

  In addition, the special symbol related state identification value determination processing S1302 is executed, and any of the specific processing constituting the special symbol related processing S1217 using the special symbol related state identification value corresponding to the ongoing game state. Is performed.

  Also, a special symbol variation display process S1304 for executing control relating to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and control relating to the fixed display of the stop symbol related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed. The special symbol confirmation display processing S1305 to be executed is also executed. Further, a special winning device operation start process S1306 to a special winning device operation stop process S1311 for controlling the operation of the lower special winning device 433 (see FIG. 7) and the upper special winning device 434 (see FIG. 7) in the special game state are also performed. . Further, in the special symbol change start process S1303, as shown in FIG. 19, in addition to the winning determination process S1403 and the stop symbol generation process S1404, for shifting to the next change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A special symbol pre-change setting process S1401 for executing control, and a special symbol holding data sequential forwarding process S1402 for executing control for changing the holding state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also executed.

  Further, a special symbol variation start time setting process S1405 for executing control for starting variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed. In the special symbol change start process S1405, a change pattern is selected in accordance with the gaming state and the above-described transition pattern. The main control board 920 controls the display contents of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 in accordance with the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern, and sends a control command corresponding to the selected change pattern to the sub control board 940. Send. In the decorative symbol display device 479, the variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display on the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 under the control of the sub-control board 940.

  Here, a method of generating the stop symbol identification value from the jackpot symbol random number value acquired from the jackpot symbol random number counter will be specifically described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing parameters for associating the big hit symbol random value with the symbol identification value, and FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the correlation between the big hit symbol random value, the symbol identification value, and the mode of the special game state. It is. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an operation for generating a stop symbol identification value from a symbol identification value. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a stop symbol identification value when the stop symbol identification value is within a predetermined value range. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating replacement, and FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a correlation between a symbol identification value, a stopped symbol identification value, and a light emission pattern.

  The main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) includes a CPU (not shown) using 8 bits as a basic operation unit, and can perform an operation in units of 8 bits or 16 bits. The jackpot symbol random value is stored in a 16-bit area of a RAM (not shown) of the main control board 920, and the range of possible values is a value from “0” to “479”. It is common to the symbol and the second special symbol.

  In the win determination process S1403, when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the big hit symbol random value is less than the first symbol ratio “172” (the first value in the left column of FIG. 21A). Is determined, and if the big hit symbol random number value is less than the first symbol ratio, the big hit symbol random number value is further reduced to the first symbol number “10” (the first symbol number in the right column of FIG. 21A). (The first value) is determined. If the big hit symbol random number is less than the first number of symbols, the big hit symbol random value is set as a symbol identification value. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random value is less than the first symbol ratio but the big hit symbol random value is not less than the first symbol number, the first symbol number is repeatedly subtracted from the big hit symbol random value, and the first symbol is reduced. A value when the number is less than the number is set as a symbol identification value. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, when the big hit symbol random numbers are “0” to “171”, the values “0” to “9” are repeated in ascending order of the big hit symbol random numbers. Assigned.

  When the big hit symbol random value is not less than the first symbol ratio, the value corresponding to the first symbol ratio is subtracted from the big hit symbol random value, and the value after the subtraction is the second symbol ratio “10”. It is determined whether it is less than (the second value in the left column of FIG. 21 (A)), and if the big hit symbol random number value is less than the second symbol ratio, the value after the subtraction is added to the value after the subtraction. A value obtained by adding the symbol number “10” of 1 is set as a symbol identification value. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, when the big hit symbol random numbers are “172” to “181”, the symbol identification values “10” to “19” are set in ascending order of the big hit symbol random numbers. Is assigned.

  If the big hit symbol random value after subtracting the value corresponding to the first symbol ratio is not less than the second symbol ratio, a value corresponding to the second symbol ratio is further calculated from the big hit symbol random value. The value after subtraction (the value obtained by subtracting the first symbol ratio and the second symbol ratio from the big hit symbol random number value) is the third symbol ratio “58” (the left symbol in the left column of FIG. 21A). (Third value) is determined. If the value after the subtraction is less than the third symbol ratio, the value after the subtraction is less than the third symbol number “10” (the third value in the right column of FIG. 21A). It is determined whether or not there is, and if the number is less than the third symbol number, the value obtained by adding the sum of the first symbol number and the second symbol number “20” to the value after the subtraction is the symbol identification. Set as a value. On the other hand, when the value after the subtraction is less than the third symbol ratio but not less than the third symbol number, the third symbol number is repeatedly reduced from the value after the subtraction to be less than the third symbol number. A value obtained by adding the total value “20” of the first number of symbols and the second number of symbols to the value in the case of is set as the symbol identification value. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 22, when the big hit symbol random numbers are “182” to “231”, the symbol identification values are “20” to “29” in order from the smaller big hit symbol random numbers. Is repeatedly assigned.

  If the big hit symbol random value after subtracting the value corresponding to the first symbol ratio and the value corresponding to the second symbol ratio is not less than the third symbol ratio, the big hit symbol random value is further deducted from the big hit symbol random value. The value corresponding to the third symbol ratio is subtracted, and the value after the subtraction (the value obtained by subtracting the first symbol ratio, the second symbol ratio, and the third symbol ratio from the jackpot symbol random value) is the fourth value. It is determined whether or not the symbol ratio is less than “240” (the fourth value in the left column of FIG. 21A). When the value after the subtraction is less than the fourth symbol ratio, the value after the subtraction is further changed to the fourth symbol number “120” (the fourth value in the right column of FIG. 21A). It is determined whether or not the number is less than the fourth symbol number. If the number is less than the fourth symbol number, the sum of the first symbol number, the second symbol number, and the third symbol number “30” is added to the value after the subtraction. Is set as the symbol identification value. On the other hand, when the value after the subtraction is not less than the fourth symbol number “120”, the fourth symbol number is further reduced from the subtracted value, and the first symbol number and the second symbol number are added to the subtracted value. A value obtained by adding the total number “30” of the number of symbols and the third number of symbols is set as the symbol identification value. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22, when the jackpot symbol random numbers are “240” to “479”, the symbol identification values “30” to “149” are sequentially assigned in ascending order of the jackpot symbol random numbers. Is repeatedly assigned.

  Further, in the win determination processing S1403, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the big special is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the symbol ratio and the number of symbols shown in FIG. 21 (B). The symbol identification value is derived in the same manner as in the case described above. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol random number is “0” to “181”, the symbols “0” to “119” are repeatedly assigned to the symbol identification value in ascending order of the jackpot symbol random number. If the jackpot symbol random numbers are "182" to "479", the symbols "120" to "239" are repeatedly assigned to the symbol identification values in ascending order of the jackpot symbol random numbers. For example, when the jackpot symbol random value is “0” or “120”, the symbol identification value is “0”, and when the jackpot symbol random value is “61” or “181”, the symbol identification value is “ 61 ", and when the big hit symbol random number value is" 119 ", the symbol identification value is" 119 ". When the big hit symbol random value is “182”, “302” or “422”, the symbol identification value is “120”, and the big hit symbol random value is “239”, “359” or “479”. In this case, the symbol identification value is “177”, and when the big hit symbol random number value is “301” or “421”, the symbol identification value is “239”.

  The symbol identification value is stored in an 8-bit area of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the range of possible values is “0” to “149” for the first special symbol, and "0" to "239" for special symbols. The symbol identification value is used to determine the mode of the special game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, when the symbol identification value of the first special symbol is “0” to “9”, the number of continuous rounds is short (six rounds in this embodiment). Special game state (short-term A in the figure), and after the special game state, the game is reduced to a time-saving game state for a predetermined number of times (40 times in this embodiment). When the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is “10” to “19”, a special game state of a short term (six rounds in the present embodiment) with a small number of continuous rounds (short term B in the figure) is set. After the special game state, the time-saving game state is established for a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 60 times) of unit games. In addition, when the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is “20” to “29”, a special game state of a long term (16 rounds in this embodiment) with a large number of continuous rounds (long term A in the figure) is set. After the special game state, the time-saving game state is set over a predetermined number of times (80 times in the present embodiment) of the unit game. Further, when the symbol identification value related to the first special symbol is “30” to “149”, a special game state of a long term (16 rounds in the present embodiment) with a large number of continuous rounds is set (long term B in the figure). After the special game state, a certain number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) of the unit game is changed to the certain-variable game state. Although not shown, when the symbol identification value related to the second special symbol is “0” to “119”, a short-time (six in this embodiment) special game state with a small number of continuous rounds is set, and the special game is performed. After the state, a certain number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) of the unit game is changed to the certain-variable game state. In addition, when the symbol identification value related to the second special symbol is “120” to “239”, a long-term special game state with a large number of continuous rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) is performed, and after the special game state, The game state is changed to a certain number of times (100 times in this embodiment). It should be noted that after a predetermined number of unit games have been completed in various time-saving game states or various probable game states, a normal game state is set.

  Furthermore, the symbol identification value is also used to identify a pattern of transition of the internal game state for controlling a fluctuation pattern in the probable change game state after the special game state and the time reduction game state. Thus, as described above, different patterns of transition of the internal game state are assigned to different symbol identification values.

  Next, an exclusive-OR operation is performed on the symbol identification value and a value obtained by performing a zero-padded left bit shift operation four times on the same value as the symbol identification value to generate a converted value of the symbol identification value. (Conversion value generation processing S1501: see FIG. 20). In this converted value, the value of the lower 4 bits is the same as the value of the lower 4 bits of the original symbol identification value, and the value of the upper 4 bits changes based on the value of the lower 4 bits of the original symbol identification value. However, the same conversion value is not generated from different symbol identification values.

  Next, a reference value is generated by adding the correction value “2 (02H)” to the conversion value (reference value generation processing S1502: see FIG. 20). In addition, in the 8-bit addition operation, when “1 (01H)” is added to “FFH”, the result becomes “00H”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 24, “FEH” and “FFH” are added. When the correction values are added, they take values “00H” and “01H” different from the normal addition result, respectively.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the reference value is equal to or less than “5 (05H)” (determination process S1503: see FIG. 20), and if the reference value is equal to or less than “5 (05H)” (S1503: Y) As shown in FIG. 24, the conversion value is replaced with a different replacement value associated with six types of reference values (conversion value replacement processing S1504: see FIG. 20). If the reference value is not equal to or smaller than “5 (05H)” (S1503: N), the converted value is not replaced with another value (skip of the converted value replacing process S1504).

  Finally, when the conversion values are “00H” to “03H” and “FEH” and “FFH”, the replacement value corresponding to the value is set as the stop symbol identification value, and the conversion value is set to another value. If there is, the converted value itself is set as the stop symbol identification value (stop symbol setting process S1505: see FIG. 20). As a result, as shown in FIG. 25, even a value in a range having continuity in the symbol identification value is a discrete value having no continuity in the stop symbol identification value.

  Here, the display mode of the stop symbol based on the stop symbol identification value in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol will be described.

  Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol includes eight light emitting portions, each of which corresponds to each bit in the stop symbol identification value. As shown in FIG. 25, when the value of the bit constituting the stop symbol identification value is “1”, the light is turned on (black circle of the light emission pattern in FIG. 25), and the value is “ If it is "0", the light is turned off (white circle of the light emission pattern in FIG. 25).

  The most discriminating mode in which all the light emitting units are turned on as in the case where the conversion value is “FFH”, or the most discriminating mode in which all the light emitting units are turned off as in the case where the conversion value is “00H” The high mode is set to be used for checking whether the pachinko machine 100 is turned on or off when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, and is set so as not to be used for displaying a stop symbol related to a big hit.

  When the conversion values are “01H” and “02H”, the two rightmost light-emitting parts are alternately turned on to indicate that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and a big hit is used. Is set so as not to be used for displaying the stop symbol related to. In addition, the mode in which the two rightmost light-emitting parts are turned on as in the case where the conversion value is “03H” is used when a large hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. It is set not to be used for displaying the stop symbol related to the big hit. By this, when the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the display during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the display of the loss are displayed only in the two rightmost light emitting portions. Can be performed by

  In the case of the above-described pachinko machine 100, in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, the relevance to the internal game state (transition pattern) of the probable changing game state is determined. The internal game state of the certainty-variable game state is notified by a light emission mode based on a stopped symbol identification value whose relevance is reduced, instead of a high symbol identification value. Therefore, depending on the player, from the notification mode by the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, the internal game state in the surely changing gaming state, that is, the reach display by the decorative symbol It is more difficult to guess which transition pattern among a plurality of transition patterns for controlling the occurrence mode is selected than when the light emission mode is determined based on the symbol identification value. This makes it difficult for the player to guess at what unit game the confirmed reach generation unit game or the lottery reach generation unit game corresponds to in the probable play state, and the playability in the probable play state is dramatically improved. I do.

  Further, in the case of the above-described pachinko machine 100, in the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, the relevance to the internal gaming state (the number of continuations) of the time-saving gaming state. Is not a high symbol identification value, but the internal game state of the certainty-variable gaming state is notified by a light emission mode based on a stopped symbol identification value whose relationship is diluted. Therefore, depending on the player, from the notification mode by the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, how many unit games can the time saving game state continue? Is more difficult to infer than when the light emission mode is determined based on the symbol identification value. Thereby, the gaming performance in the time-saving gaming state is dramatically improved.

  Further, in the case of the above-described pachinko machine 100, in generating the stop symbol identification value, a part is excluded (the conversion values are “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, “FEH”, and “FFH”). ), The program capacity is generated only by a predetermined calculation based on the symbol identification value, so that the program capacity is smaller than when determining based only on the table representing the correspondence between the symbol identification value and the stopped symbol identification value. Various stop symbol identification values can be easily generated without greatly increasing the data capacity.

  Further, in the case of the above-described pachinko machine 100, since the operation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is a combination of the zero padding left bit shift operation as the logical operation and the exclusive OR operation as the logical operation. In addition, the operation can be performed at a higher speed than in the case where the four arithmetic operations are included. Thereby, even if the calculation for generating the stop symbol identification value is performed before the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the start of the variation can be suppressed from being delayed.

  Further, in the case of the above-described pachinko machine 100, the converted value of the symbol identification value is a value (“00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, “FEH”, and “FEH”) that the user does not want to adopt as the stopped symbol identification value. FFH ”), those values can be easily eliminated by substituting the values with predetermined substitution values based on the table. In addition, since only a small number of values that are not desired to be adopted as stop symbol identification values are replaced based on the table, an increase in the data capacity required for storing the table can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the case of the above-described pachinko machine 100, values that are not to be adopted as stop symbol identification values are distributed in two separated ranges (“00H” to “03H” and “FEH” to “FFH”). Since the separated ranges are a continuous range including the minimum value “00H” and a continuous range including the maximum value “FFH”, the two separated ranges are connected to each other by adding or subtracting a predetermined correction value. Can be integrated into a range. Therefore, whether or not the converted value of the symbol identification value is replaced with the predetermined replacement value can be determined collectively, and the control process is simplified. In the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, two values are separated from each other by adding the same number of values “2” as the number of values included in the maximum value range (“FEH” to “FFH”) to the converted value. The ranges ("00H" to "03H" and "FEH" to "FFH") are integrated into one continuous range ("00H" to "05H") containing the minimum value.

<Advance production and small hits in the probable play state>
The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an advance effect and a small hit function. After describing the structure of the preceding effect, the structure of the small hit will be described.

  The precedent effect is an effect indicating that a privilege is to be given in a unit game whose execution has not been started yet. The precedent effect is directed to the visual sense by the display of the decorative symbol display device 479 or the like, to the tactile effect by the vibration of the launch operation device 250 or the input operation device 260, or to the sound output from the sound devices 281 and 282. It is executed by any or a plurality of devices that stimulate a sense that allows the player to recognize the situation, such as a staging for hearing. In the following, a description will be given of a case in which a preceding effect is performed using an effect for visual sense by display, but instead of the preceding effect by display or in addition to the preceding effect by display, the effect on other senses is performed. A privilege may be suggested to the player by a preceding effect of operating the device.

  In the preceding performance, examples of the provision of the privilege suggested to the player include a big hit win and a small hit win described later, in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is provided, or an occurrence of a probable changing gaming state. This kind of benefit is a substantial benefit that leads to the award of a prize ball as a game value. In addition, the privilege given to the player also includes a special production effect such as a reach production that expects a big hit or the appearance of a specific character, and this type of privilege is a formal privilege that does not give a game value. . Even if the lottery result of the unit game is lost as a result of the reach production, compared to the unit game without the reach production, the player is expected to partially clear the multiple stages leading to the jackpot winning and approach the winning A privilege that gives a feeling can be given.

  The precedent effect is executed by judging the content of the unit game that has not yet started to be executed, and by displaying or outputting sound corresponding to the content. For example, as shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the execution of the preceding effect is controlled by controlling the setting of the execution of the display effect on the main control board 920.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process S1301 in the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 18), and FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hold information output setting process S1707 in the start winning process S1301.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the start winning process S1301, first, it is determined whether or not there is a first special symbol starting winning (S1601). If there is a first special symbol starting winning (S1601: Y), A prize ball setting process S1602 for updating the value of a payout counter for paying out a prize ball, and a prize information output setting process S1603 for outputting to the external device which of the starting prize devices has a prize.

  After the processing of S1603, it is determined whether or not the current number of unit game reservations is less than 4 and the maximum number of unit game rights is reserved (S1604). If the number is less than the maximum number (S1604: Y), the information of the current number of times of holding (for example, “3”) stored in the first symbol holding times storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) is held for one time. The number is updated to information (for example, “4”) (S1605).

  After the process of S1605, a random number acquisition process S1606 and a hold information output setting process S1607 are performed. In the random number acquisition process S1606, the values of the winning random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the stop pattern random number of the first special symbol are stored in the first symbol holding information storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) in association with the updated information on the number of times of suspension. To store. In the suspension information output setting processing S1607, a setting for transmitting the suspension information including the increase in the right of the unit game to the sub control board 940 to the sub control board 940 is executed, and the processing corresponding to the above-described preceding effect is also performed. The suspension information set in the suspension information output setting process S1607 is transmitted to the sub-control board 940 by the external information output process S1221 (see FIG. 12) performed thereafter.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1601 that there is no start winning of the first special symbol (S1601: N), the processing of S1602 to S1607 is skipped and the processing shifts to S1701. In addition, if the number of times of suspension of the unit game is “4” in the process of S1604 (S1604: N), the process proceeds to S1701 without executing the process of updating the number of times of suspension or acquiring a random number.

  In the processing from S1701 to S1707, the processing related to the start winning according to the second special symbol is executed as in the processing for starting winning according to the first special symbol (S1601 to S1607). The contents of the processing are the same as the processing relating to the first special symbol described above. In the hold information output setting processing S1707 as a part of the processing relating to the second special symbol, processing corresponding to the preceding effect performed during the probable change game state is executed. For details of this processing, see FIG. Will be explained. Note that the hold information output setting process S1607 for the first special symbol is configured by the same process as the hold information output setting process S1707 for the second special symbol, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the hold information output setting process S1707, as shown in FIG. 27, first, it is determined whether or not the right to the unit game based on the current winning start is held (S1801). This determination determines whether the situation is in the probable change game state and waiting for the establishment of the unit game right, or whether the unit game is being executed and the unit game right is suspended. It is done.

  When the unit game is executed immediately without holding the right of the unit game (S1801: N), a normal hold command is set (S1802), and the hold information output setting process S1707 is ended. In the situation where a start winning is generated in the start winning process S1301 in which the current hold information output setting process S1707 is executed, the unit game is immediately started in the probability fluctuation state, so that the privilege is given in the unit game. Since there is no need to suggest by the preceding effect, the suspension information output setting process S1707 is terminated without passing through the processes after S1805 for executing the preceding effect. Note that the processing of S1801 may be omitted, and the processing of S1803 and thereafter may be executed even in a situation where the unit game based on the winning start is immediately executed, and in this case, the program can be simplified. .

  If the right of the unit game is suspended (S1801: N), it is determined whether or not the big hit occurrence information is stored in the big hit information storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) (S1803).

  The jackpot information storage unit is an area for confirming the presence / absence of jackpot occurrence information, and is constituted by, for example, a 1-bit flag (jackpot storage flag). The big hit storage flag is set to ON when there is a unit game in which the value of the winning random number counter corresponding to the big hit is stored among the unit game being executed and the unit game which has already been started and has not been executed yet. The big hit occurrence information is stored, and when the unit game corresponding to the big hit winning is completed, the flag turns off and the big hit occurrence information is erased.

  If the jackpot occurrence information is stored in the process of S1803 (S1803: Y), a normal hold command is set (S1802), and the hold information output setting process S1707 ends. When the big hit occurrence information is stored, the gaming state shifts from the probable game state to the special game state, and the probable game state may be started by a new transition pattern selected in the big hit. If a unit game with such a change in the game state is being executed or the right of the unit game has already been reserved, the precedent effect of the unit game established after that may differ from the actual unit game There is. Therefore, the suspension information output setting processing S1707 is terminated without passing through the processing after S1805 for executing the preceding effect.

  In the process of S1803, if the jackpot occurrence information is not stored (S1803: N), it is determined whether the number of remaining unit games is greater than "0" (S1804). S1804: N), a normal hold command is set (S1802), and the hold information output setting processing S1707 ends. This is because if the remaining unit game number is “0”, the game state is not in the probable game state, and each process for executing the preceding effect in the probable game state is not required. Note that even when the remaining unit game number is “0” (S1804: N), the processing after S1805 may be executed. In this case, a game state different from the probable change game state (for example, normal In the gaming state), it is possible to execute a preceding effect with respect to winning a jackpot or occurrence of a reach.

  In the processing of S1804, when it is determined that the number of remaining unit games is larger than "0" (S1804: Y), the current number of remaining unit games is extracted from the unit game number storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM), The current number of suspensions is subtracted from the remaining unit game number to calculate the target number of times, and information corresponding to the target number of times (for example, the target number of times itself) is stored in the target number of times storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) (S1805). ).

  After the processing of S1805, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S1806: Y). The number of times of addition is set as a new target number, and information corresponding to the target number is stored in the target number storage unit.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 100, in the special symbol fixed display processing S1305 (see FIG. 18) for stopping the variable display, the remaining unit game number in the unit game number storage unit is updated, and the variable display is continuously executed. In this situation, the target count stored in the target count storage unit matches the actual remaining unit game count. On the other hand, in a situation where the execution of the unit game is on standby (for example, during the fixed stop of the variable display or during the special game state), the unit game to be executed first among the held unit games (that is, the first held unit game) Is equal to the first unit game in the number of remaining unit games, but when the number of hold times is subtracted as the target number of times in the processing of S1805, there is a difference of one time between the target number of times and the number of remaining unit games. obtain.

  The processing of S1806 and S1807 is processing for correcting the remaining unit game number of the unit game in which the start winning prize has been established, which is the target of the preceding effect, whereby the target number of times is accurately counted and one remaining unit is calculated. Only the number of games is stored in the unit number of games storage unit, and the target number of times corresponding to the number of times of suspension and the number of remaining unit games being executed can be used in the control of the main control board 920. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chances of occurrence of a deviation between the stored number of remaining unit games even in a moment of control. Therefore, the timer interrupt process and the main process are mixed, and the debugging of the program in each situation where the process at the time of the power failure or the like occurs is simplified, and the accurate process is realized by using the storage unit having a small capacity. be able to.

  It should be noted that the update of the number of remaining unit games in the unit game number storage unit does not necessarily need to be the timing at which the variable display ends, and may be the timing at which the variable display starts, or the end of the game relating to the unit game (for example, The timing at which the processing of the fixed stop ends or the timing of ending the special game state based on the big hit in the case of a unit game that generates a big hit may be used, and when these timings are set, the correction processing of S1806 and S1807 Can be omitted, the debugging of the program can be simplified, and an accurate process using a small-capacity storage unit can be realized. In addition, the unit game number storage unit stores the remaining unit game number based on the unit game being executed and the remaining unit based on the remaining unit number when the number of the unit game being executed and the number of rights reserved are exhausted. Even if the number of games is stored separately, the target number of times can be derived.

  In the processing from S1901, the contents of the unit game in which the right has been generated are confirmed using the target times stored in the target times storage unit, and the hold information corresponding to the contents is set. First, in the processing of S1901, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter acquired by the occurrence of the start winning is a winning value (hereinafter, referred to as a jackpot winning value) for winning a jackpot (S1901), and a jackpot winning is determined. If it is a value (S1901: Y), the big hit storage presence flag is turned on, big hit occurrence information is stored in the big hit information storage unit (S1902), and a hold command to which big hit winning information is added is set (S1903). ), And the hold information output setting processing S1707 ends.

  Here, the hold command includes information corresponding to the updated number of times of hold, and information that can determine which of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is to be held as the symbol type. Further, information output to the sub-control board 940 by adding information corresponding to the presence / absence of a big hit and the presence / absence of a reach as a necessary information for executing the preceding effect is exemplified. Upon receiving the hold command, the sub-control board 940 executes a preceding effect by displaying a display mode or sound according to the content of the hold command, and suggests a big hit or a reach to the player. In addition, when the right of the unit game in which the privilege is given to the player such as the winning of the jackpot or the occurrence of the reach is generated, it is not necessary to suggest the occurrence of the right to the player with a probability of 100%. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a leading production is executed at a specified ratio and a big hit is generated even in the situation where the preceding production is not executed, and bonuses such as unit games that did not win big hits and unit games that do not generate reach In the unit game where the grant was not established, the preceding effect is executed in the same manner as the preceding effect, and even if the preceding effect is executed, the grant of the privilege is not fixed and the player is expected to expect the grant. It is good.

  In the process of S1901, when it is determined that the value of the winning random number counter acquired by the occurrence of the start winning is not the big hit winning value (S1901: N), the unit game is a game that does not win a big hit, and It is determined whether or not a losing reach in which the reach effect is fixed and stopped with a losing symbol occurs (S1904). The determination of the occurrence of the losing reach is based on the number of times stored in the number-of-times storage unit, a value (pattern number) for identifying the transition pattern of the internal game state, and the transition pattern of the state corresponding to the pattern number (the predetermined pattern of the ROM). Is determined by determining whether or not reach occurs in the variable display of the target number of unit games.

  In the process of S1904, when it is determined that the losing reach occurs (S1904: Y), a hold command to which losing reach occurrence information corresponding to the reach occurrence is added is set (S1905). On the other hand, in the processing of S1904, when it is determined that the losing reach does not occur (S1904: N), a normal hold command is set (S1906).

  After the processing of S1905 or S1906 is executed, it is determined whether the gaming state in the unit game one time before the target number of times is the state C (probable state C) (S1907), and it is determined that the gaming state is the probable state C. (S1907: Y), the advantageous game start information is added to the hold command (S1908), and the hold information output setting processing S1707 ends. In the pachinko machine 100, the probable change state D that is started after the probable change state C is set to a game state in which it is easier to provide a bonus due to a small hit that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the advantageous game state is set. Is suggested to the player by a preceding effect through the sub control board 940. The details of the game state related to the small hit will be described later.

  In the process of S1907, when it is determined that the gaming state one time before the target number of times is not the probability change state C (S1907), it is determined whether the game state of the target number of times is the state D (probable variation state D) (S1909). If it is the probable change state D (S1909: Y), after adding the advantageous game execution information to the hold command (S1910), the hold information output setting processing S1707 ends. In the unit game in the probable change state D, a bonus due to a small hit is easily given to the player, and the grant of the bonus is suggested to the player by a preceding effect through the sub-control board 940.

  In the process of S1909, when it is determined that the game state of the target number of times is not the state D (S1909: N), it is determined whether the game state of the unit game executed nine times after the target number of times is the probability change state C ( (S1911), if it is the probable change state C (S1911: Y), the advantageous game approach information is added to the hold command (S1912), and the hold information output setting processing S1707 ends. In a situation in which the gaming state executed after a certain number of times (in the present embodiment, nine times) with respect to the target number of times is the probability change state C, an advantageous gaming state in which a bonus due to a small hit is easily given to the player Can be started with the remaining 10 times, and the situation in which the award of the privilege due to the advantageous game state is approaching is suggested to the player by the preceding effect through the sub-control board 940.

  In the process of S1911, when it is determined that the gaming state of the unit game executed nine times after the target number of times is not the state C (S1911: N), the information for generating the preceding effect in response to the hold command is provided. The suspension information output setting processing S1707 is terminated without adding.

  Next, the small hit will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100, a small hit is set in addition to the above-mentioned big hit as a lottery result of the unit game according to the second special symbol. When a small hit is won, a different privilege is provided to the player than when a large hit is won. Note that a special game state in which a privilege of the same size as that of a small hit win may be set as one of the types of special game states that occur when a big hit is won.

  In the pachinko machine 100, when the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting winning switch 442, it is entered in the second special symbol lottery when a small hit is won. The regulating solenoid 463 operates. If the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol acquired based on the start winning is a value that wins a predetermined small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit winning value), a small hit is won. . The small hit winning value is set to a value different from the big hit winning value, and is set so that the big hit and the small hit are not simultaneously established in one start winning. In the unit game that has won the small hit, a predetermined small hit symbol is displayed in the special symbol display device 471, 472 out of symbols other than the big hit symbol (losing symbols displayed when the big hit is not won). Is set as a stop symbol in.

  When a small hit is won, the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 is operated, and the lower large prize device 433 is in an entry allowable posture. The allowable entry posture is determined when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls is detected by the large winning switch 443 in one small hit winning, or a predetermined maximum allowable entry time (for example, 3 seconds). Is terminated when the time has elapsed, and thereafter, the vehicle returns to the approach prohibition posture. During the period in which the approach allowable posture is continued, the small hitting game state is started when the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit winning state is displayed corresponding to the small hitting game state (small hitting game state). Then, after the lower big winning device 433 returns to the entry-prohibited position, the small hitting game state ends. In the small hitting game state, similarly to the special game state corresponding to the big hit, the execution of the variable display is awaited, and after the small hitting gaming state, the variable display of the next unit game is performed.

  The control of the small hitting game state is performed in the special symbol related processing S1217 (see FIG. 18), and it is determined in the special symbol fixed display processing S1305 whether or not the small hit is won. When the small hit is won, each processing of the big winning device operation start process S1306 to the big winning device operation stop process S1311 is performed, and the lower big winning device 433 is in the entry prohibition position for a period corresponding to the above-described time. Becomes It is not always necessary to wait for the variable display during the small hitting game state, and the variable display of the next unit game may be started during the small hitting gaming state.

  The small hit differs from the big hit in that it does not serve as an opportunity to change the game state as compared with the winning of the big hit. When the small hit is won, the game proceeds according to the game state determined in the previous lottery. For example, in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state continues after the small hitting gaming state, and in the probability changing gaming state, one unit game is executed by the end of the small hitting gaming state, and the remaining unit gaming state The number is reduced by one.

  Here, details of the contents of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the progress of the game state in the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram comparing game specifications in each game state. In FIG. 28, the time saving game state is omitted.

  When the game is started by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 100, first, as shown in FIG. 28, the game is started from the normal game state. In the normal gaming state, a right to start a unit game is generated by a winning start, and a game is executed in expectation of a jackpot. When the right of the unit game is generated by the start winning, the special symbol (specifically, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is displayed and fixed and stopped, and the big hit of the unit game related to the special symbol is won. Then, the game state shifts to the special game state. Whether or not the big hit lottery is won is determined by a winning determination process S1403 (see FIG. 19) constituting the special symbol-related process S1217 (see FIG. 12) for controlling the unit game relating to the special symbol.

  In the special game state, for example, the large prize winning devices (specifically, the lower large prize winning device 433 and the upper large prize winning device 434) are activated a predetermined number of times (specifically, 6 or 16 times) for about 30 seconds. When the transition condition (V prize) to the probable change game state is established during the special game state, the game proceeds to the probable change game state. If the transition condition is not satisfied, the normal game state is passed through the time-saving game state. Move to. Whether or not the V winning has occurred is executed as a part of the special symbol related processing S1217 (see FIG. 12), and the condition (predetermined specificity) that the V winning occurs and the probable change game state is started. When the game start condition is satisfied), information corresponding to the probable change game state is stored in the game state storage unit (a predetermined area of the RAM) for storing the game state, and a special symbol according to the information is stored. A lottery condition is set, and a remaining unit number of games corresponding to the number of executions of the probable change game state is set. In addition, the conditions of the ordinary symbol lottery in the ordinary symbol-related processing S1218 (see FIG. 12) and the transition time of the right start winning device 432 to the entry allowable posture are also controlled in accordance with the information stored in the gaming state storage unit. .

  In the probable change game state, the right of the unit game is generated by the start prize (mainly the start prize according to the second special symbol) and the game is executed. In this probable change game state, a big hit and a small hit are generated, and the small hit is continuously generated after reaching a predetermined remaining unit game number according to the transition pattern. On the other hand, if a big hit occurs in the probability change game state, the probability change game state ends and shifts to the special game state, and again the probability change according to the transition pattern according to the value of the big hit symbol random number counter acquired at the time of the big hit win. The gaming state is started. In the probable change game state, one start winning prize is generated, and after each special symbol is fluctuated and displayed, the remaining unit game number is decremented by one each time the game is stopped, and a big hit is reached until the remaining unit game number becomes “0”. Is not won, the game state shifts to the normal game state.

  Next, specific specifications of the game in each game state will be described. The fluctuating time that can be selected in the pachinko machine 100 is divided into four, and “short time” is 1 second to 5 seconds, “normal time” is 15 seconds to 30 seconds, and “long time 1” is 60 When the second is 90 seconds and the “long time 2” is classified as 120 seconds to 180 seconds, the selection frequency of the fluctuation time selected when the big hit is not won (big hit is not won) corresponding to each game state. Have different settings. In FIG. 29, the selection frequency of the change time of the jackpot non-winning in each game state is shown in the order of “◎”, “○”, “△”, and “−” in descending order of frequency.

  In the normal game state, the normal time is most easily selected, and as the fluctuation display of the normal time, a loss display without a reach display in the unit game is executed. Next, it is easy to select the long time 1 which is the second longest time after the normal time, and the loss display is mainly displayed. The fluctuation display of the long time 2 longer than the long time 1 is set to the least frequently occurring, and when the fluctuation display of the long time 2 is passed, the fluctuation display of the big hit winning ratio is high and the expectation of the big hit winning is executed. Is done. The short-term fluctuation is set so that it is not selected or is harder to select than the long-time fluctuation 2.

  In the probable changing game state, the fluctuating time selected according to the five probable changing states A to E is different. In the probable changing state A and the probable changing state D, the short-time fluctuating display occupies most, and the other fluctuating time is a big hit. Is set to be not executed or hardly executed (for example, less than 1%). In the probable change states B and E, a long-time 1 fluctuation display longer than that in the probable change states A and D is easily selected. In the probable change state E, an end effect accompanied by a display or sound that informs the player of the end of the probable change state is executed. In the probable change state C, the short-time fluctuation display and the long-time fluctuation display 1 are executed at substantially the same ratio.

  As for the jackpot probability, the normal game state is set to a low probability, and the probable change game state is set to a higher probability than the normal game state. As the big hit privilege, in the normal gaming state, a long time opening in which a game ball can enter the winning opening of the lower big winning device 433 or the upper big winning device 434 for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds or 16 rounds). The approach allowable posture corresponding to the state is continued, and in the probable change game state, the setting is set to be more advantageous than the normal game state, and the long open state over a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is set. .

  The small hitting probability changes according to the gaming state, and is set to a low probability (for example, 1 / 288.5, which is the same as the big hitting probability in the normal gaming state) in the normal gaming state and the probable change states A to C. Have been. On the other hand, in the probability change state D, the probability is set to be higher than that in the normal gaming state. The number of the jackpot winning values among the values of the winning random number counter is set to a number (for example, “20”) that is larger in the probability change state than in the normal gaming state (for example, “2”). In the probability change states D and E, all the values of the winning random number counter other than the big hit winning value are set as the small hit winning values. In the probable change states D and E, the small hit is established with a much higher probability than the big hit, and the small hit win is set to easily occur continuously as the games corresponding to the certain change states D and E continue.

  The small hit bonus is set to a constant bonus in both the normal game state and the probable change game state. As the small hit bonus, an open state in which a game ball can enter the winning opening of the lower big winning device 433 occurs for a predetermined opening time (for example, 3 seconds).

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 due to the small hit will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 30 is a diagram exemplifying a relationship between the progress of time in the probability-variable game state and the number of balls that can be obtained by the player by paying out game balls (hereinafter, referred to as the number of obtained balls). Here, the number of obtained balls is a difference ball number obtained by subtracting the number of balls fired in the game area from the number of prize balls paid out by winning.

  In the pachinko machine 100, when a big hit is won in the normal gaming state, one transition pattern is determined from a plurality of transition patterns having different timings at which the internal state is switched in the probable gaming state, and the game proceeds according to the transition pattern. FIG. 30 (A) shows a case in which a big hit is won and a transition is made to the probable change game state, in which a pattern 65 is selected as a transition pattern and a transition is made to the normal game state without winning a big hit in the probable change game state. It is illustrated.

  The pattern 65 is a pattern in which the number of remaining reach occurrence unit games is 68 and the number of reach reach occurrence remaining games is 32 (see FIG. 13). In other words, if the jackpot is not won in the probability change game state, the unit game in the probability change state A is executed from 1 to 31 times (the number of remaining unit games = 100 to 69) for a total of 31 times, and the 32nd (the number of remaining unit games) = 68), the unit game in the probability change state B is executed once, and a losing reach occurs in the unit game.

  Thereafter, returning to the probability change state A, the unit game is executed a total of 35 times from the 33rd to the 67th (the number of remaining unit games = 67 to 33), and the probability change state C in the 68th (the number of remaining unit games = 32) unit game. Is executed once. In the unit game in the probable state C, the fluctuating display accompanied by the loss reach or the short-time fluctuating display similar to the probable state A is executed with a half probability.

  Thereafter, the unit games in the probability change state D are executed from the 69th to the 99th times (the number of remaining unit games = 31 to 1) 31 times in total. In the unit game in the probable change state D, if the big hit is not won, the small hit is won, and the fluctuation display for about 3 seconds is executed based on the starting winning according to the second special symbol. After that, the second special symbol corresponding to the small hit win is fixed and stopped, and an advantageous game state is generated by the entry allowable posture of the lower big winning device 433 for a fixed time (for example, 3 seconds). As a result, a predetermined number (for example, an average of 5) of winnings is generated in one unit game, and the predetermined number is multiplied by the number of winning balls (for example, 13) for one winning. Game balls (for example, 5 × 13 = 65) are given to the player as a privilege by paying out one small hit. As the number of acquired balls, the number obtained by subtracting the number of shot balls of 10 balls fired in approximately 6 seconds, which is obtained by adding the time of the variable display and the time of the advantageous game state, from the payout for small hits (for example, 55) Is set to

  Here, the number of winnings in one unit game is not necessarily a fixed number, and a predetermined number (5) of gaming balls that allow a winning after the lower large winning device 433 is in the approach allowable posture. There is a case where extra game balls may win a prize before the prize is detected and the sphere shifts to the no-entry position, or the sphere may shift to the no-entry position without reaching the predetermined number. In the present description, the winning number is fixed and the description is simplified, and the same applies to the following. The number of balls obtained in one unit game in which a small hit occurs or the number of balls obtained in the special game state depends on the structure of the lower winning device 433 of the pachinko machine 100, the shape of the path along which the game balls flow, and the like. It is adjustable, by measuring the number of obtained balls, and adjusting the shape of the structural part, the arrangement position of the switch, the duration of the allowable entry posture, the number of winnings for one small hit etc. so as to match the design value Can be fine-tuned.

  In the unit game in the probable change state E, a fluctuation display of a special symbol longer than the probabilistic state D (for example, a fluctuation display of about 60 seconds) is executed based on the winning start of the second special symbol. After that, the second special symbol corresponding to the small hit win is fixed and stopped, and an advantageous game state is generated in the same manner as the probability change state D due to the entry allowable posture of the lower big winning device 433 for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). , It is possible to obtain more game balls than the unit game in the probability change state D. In other words, the bonuses of the small hit winning game state corresponding to the sum of the number of unit games in the probability change state D and the probability change state E are given to the player after a certain time has elapsed from the start of the probability change game state.

  In one probable change game state, the privilege for the small hit is equivalent to the number of unit games in the probable change states D and E. When the transition pattern is pattern 65, the privilege is obtained as a privilege for one small hit. The number of balls multiplied by the number of unit games of 31 times (for example, 55 balls × 31 times = approximately 1700) is given to the player as a privilege. The number of the game balls is larger than the number of balls obtained in the 16-round special game state controlled after the winning of the big hit, and the player can not only generate the special game state but also change the probability state in the probable change game state thereafter. Playing games with the expectation of starting D.

  After the unit game in the probable change state E is executed, the game state shifts from the probable change game state to the normal game state, and the number of acquired balls once obtained by continuing the game is gradually consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (A), the number of acquired balls gradually increases in the special game state and the probable change states D and E from the jackpot winning through the special game state and the probable change game state. It gradually decreases in states A to C. First, the number of acquired balls increases according to the special game state after the occurrence of the big hit.

  In the special game state, the number of balls obtained according to the continuation round determined based on the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter as the type of the special game state. In the special game state, the winning number of game balls (8) as a condition for shifting from the entry allowable position to the entry prohibited position in one round is multiplied by the number of prize balls (13) paid out by winning the game balls. The number (104) of game balls is basically paid out after one round. However, the number of obtained balls is not a fixed number, for example, because a round occurs in which the game balls enter the grand prize winning device immediately before shifting to the entry prohibited position and a large number of game balls are paid out. The number of acquired balls in the special game state in the pachinko machine 100 is set to, for example, approximately 500 in the case of winning 6 rounds, and approximately 1500 in the case of winning 16 rounds, which is larger than the case of 6 rounds.

  In the probable change game state, among the probable change states A to E, in the probable change states A to C corresponding to some of the states, the number of acquired balls is not increased as compared to the special game state, and the number is kept almost constant, In detail, it is set to gradually decrease. Since the number of acquired balls in the probable states A to C is set to gradually decrease instead of a fixed amount, the state of the number of obtained balls can be changed according to the length of the period of the probable states A to C. The number of balls can be made significantly different according to the pattern selected as the transition pattern, so that a variety of playability due to the change in the transition pattern can be provided to the player. In addition, as the probable change states A to C, the number of launched balls and the number of awarded balls match, and as a result, the number of acquired balls may not be decreased and may be set to maintain a nearly constant state, or may be substantially the same as the normal game state. The setting may be such that the game balls decrease in the ratio of.

  In the probable variable game state, the number of obtained balls increases in the probable states D and E corresponding to some of the probable states A to E as compared to the probable states A to C. This increase in the number of acquired balls is due to the fact that an advantageous game state based on the winning of a small hit occurs a plurality of times in succession. Can enjoy the benefits of the advantageous game state in which it is possible to continue to obtain game balls for a certain period by the unit game. For example, when the pattern 65 is selected as the transition pattern, approximately 1700 patterns, and in the pattern 7 in which the probable state D continues for the longest in the transition pattern, the unit games in the probable states D and E continue 67 times. The number of acquired balls is approximately 3,700. On the other hand, in the pattern 105 in which the probability change state D is the shortest in the transition patterns, the unit games in the probability change states D and E continue 12 times, and the number of acquired balls is approximately 650. As described above, even if a large hit is not won in the probability change game state, after a certain unit game is executed, a bonus is given to the player by the win of the small hit.

  Next, a case in which a big hit is won in the probability change game state will be described. FIG. 30 (B) shows a case where a jackpot is won and a transition is made to the probable game state. After the pattern 7 is selected as the transition pattern and the special game state is executed, the probable game state is started and the probable game state is started. An example is shown in which a special gaming state in which a big hit is further won and a certain-variable gaming state in which the pattern 105 is a transition pattern are executed. The pattern 7 is a transition pattern in which the probable change state D is set to be long, and as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 30 (B), if the jackpot is not won in the probable change game state, the special game state More prize balls are obtained from the middle to the end of the probable play state, and for example, about 4500 obtained balls can be expected.

  However, if the second big hit is won in the middle of the probable game state, and a probable game state of another transition pattern is started and a transition pattern in which the number of probable state D is short is selected, the occurrence of the special game state Even if the number of the game balls increases, the increase in the number of the game balls during the probable change game state is smaller than the transition pattern (pattern 7) before the occurrence of the big hit, and the number of obtained balls as the final outgoing ball decreases even if the big hit occurs. Cases can arise. For this reason, while expecting the occurrence of a big hit, the player is worried about the case where the number of balls obtained by the small hit winning which may have been initially obtained due to the occurrence of the big hit is reduced, and plays the game. . Conversely, if a transition pattern with a short number of probable changes D is selected and then a transition pattern with a long number is selected, a large number of game balls will be obtained, and Various game characteristics in which the privilege given to the player varies depending on the selection order can be added.

  Next, a description will be given of the playability of the pachinko machine 100 based on the preceding effect. In the pachinko machine 100, the earlier the probable change state D is started, the greater the number of balls obtained until the probable change game state ends. For this reason, the player plays the game in the probable change game state in expectation of the early start of the probable change state D in addition to the jackpot winning. In the probable change game state, a preceding effect is executed, and a big hit is won and the start time of the probable change state D is suggested to the player.

  The preceding effect for the jackpot winning is set in the hold information output setting processing S1707 (see FIG. 27), and a hold command with the jackpot winning information added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub-control board 940 when a start winning is generated. The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in accordance with the hold command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held is displayed by the number of holdings indicated by circles arranged side by side, and is displayed by a large circle as the holding display of the second special symbol. In the case where a unit game that has not been won in a big hit based on a normal start winning prize is additionally displayed with a blue circle, and a held game that has been won in a big hit has not been won. The display is suspended in another mode (for example, a circle that changes to rainbow color is additionally displayed). The player can visually recognize the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 not only that the number of times of holding the unit game has increased but also that the unit game to win the big hit has been held. In addition, when the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command to which the jackpot winning information is added, the hold command to which the later-described los-reach occurrence information is added is sub-controlled at a certain probability (for example, a probability of 1/10). The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in the same manner as when the board 940 receives the information, and the setting is made to indicate a possibility that a special game state will occur due to a big hit after the reach effect.

  A plurality of types of preceding effects are set as the preceding effects with respect to the start time of the probable change state D. One is an undetermined preceding effect in a situation where the start time of the probability change state D has been selected, but its execution has not yet been determined (hereinafter, referred to as a pre-determination preceding effect). This is a preceding effect after the execution is determined after the start of the state D is determined (hereinafter, referred to as a post-determination preceding effect). In the following, the content displayed as the pre-determination preceding effect is referred to as a pre-determination preceding effect display, and the content displayed as the post-determination preceding effect is referred to as a post-determination preceding effect display.

  The pre-confirmation advance effect can be executed when the right of the unit game nine times before the probability change state C is established by the start winning. Specifically, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), a hold command to which the advantageous game approach information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub-control board 940 when a start winning is generated, and the hold is performed. The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled according to the command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the remaining unit game number display corresponding to the remaining unit game number displayed by the number “55” in the center of the display area is normally lit and displayed at a constant luminance, and When the control board 940 receives the hold command to which the advantageous game approach information is added, in addition to additionally displaying the circle for the increase in the hold of the unit game, the remaining unit game number display blinks as the pre-determination preceding effect display. This blinking display is continued until the probable change game state ends or the jackpot is won. The player recognizes that not only the number of times of holding the unit game has been increased, but also that the probable state D following the probable state C can be started in the unit game about 10 times later, and that the small hit win continues. A game state can be expected. For this reason, it is possible to enjoy the gaming ability of visually recognizing a change in the mode of the number of remaining unit games, with the expectation that the blinking display of the number of remaining unit games will be started at a little earlier stage.

  If a big win is won by a start winning established after the blinking display of the remaining unit game number display is started, the certain-variable game state ends and shifts to the special game state. For this reason, the start of the blinking display of the number of remaining unit games does not necessarily mean that the unit game in the probable change state D is executed. In this manner, the blinking display of the remaining unit game number is the pre-determination effect for the probability change state D.

  Further, another pre-determination precedent effect can be executed when the right of the unit game in the probability change state C is established by the start winning. When the right of the unit game in the probable change state C is established, the precedent effect before the confirmation by the hold display and the precedent effect before the confirmation by executing the effect of the loss reach are executed. The pre-determination precedent effect by the hold display is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub-control board 940 when a hold command to which the advantageous game start information is added generates a start winning in the hold information output setting processing S1707 (see FIG. 27). The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in accordance with the hold command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, a hold display corresponding to the increase in the hold of the unit game indicated by a circle at the lower part of the display area is additionally displayed by a blue circle at normal times, and the sub control board 940 is advantageous. When a hold command to which game execution information is added is received, a circle for the increase in the hold of the unit game is additionally displayed in green as a precedent effect display before confirmation. That is, a mode (blue circle) corresponding to the addition of the unit game right to the probability change states A and B, and a mode (rainbow colored circle) corresponding to the addition of the unit game right to the jackpot winning. Executes a hold display corresponding to the addition of the unit game right in another mode (green circle). The green display of the unit game is shifted to the left every time the unit game being executed is completed, and is continuously displayed until the unit game in the certain state C is started.

  In addition, in the case where the jackpot lottery is not won in the probability change state C, the reach effect with the second reach display is executed with a probability of 1/2. The player may have a display in which the reach effect involving two reach displays is definitely stopped in a lost pattern after the probability change game state is started (preceding effect display before confirmation), and the probability change state D may be started from the next unit game. You can recognize that. In other words, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be suggested by the number of executions of the reach effect as the mode of the variable display, and the control of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be realized using the transition pattern. In addition, the preceding effect can be easily realized only by changing the game state according to the preset fluctuation time. In addition, since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in which the reach effect is executed is set to be longer than the fluctuation display of the probable change state A in which the reach effect is not executed, an advantage such as "chance time occurrence" is used by using the time. After performing a fluctuation display to which an effect indicating a special game state is added, and executing an effect for clearly distinguishing the switching of the game state, the game state can be shifted to an advantageous game state based on the probability change state D.

  In the case where the jackpot lottery is not won in the probability change state C, the short-time change display is selected with a half probability. The player is expected to expect that the probability change state D can be started from the next unit game even if the reach effect with two reach displays does not stop at the lost symbol after the probability change game state is started. Can be. That is, even when the number of executions of the reach effect as the mode of the variable display does not reach the predetermined number, an advantageous gaming state can be generated using the transition pattern. In addition, as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in which the reach effect is not executed, a fluctuation time equivalent to (or the same as) the fluctuation display of the probable fluctuation state A is set, and a suddenly advantageous gaming state starts after a monotonous situation continues. The situation that is performed can be enjoyed by the player. Thereby, it is possible to provide a game property in which the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state by the probable change state D in various modes different from the effect of clearly distinguishing the switching of the game state.

  When a losing reach occurs during the certain-variable game state, a hold command to which losing reach occurrence information is added is set. Specifically, in the hold information output setting processing S1707 (see FIG. 27), a hold command to which the loss-reach occurrence information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub-control board 940 when a start winning is generated, and the hold command is issued. The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled according to the command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, when a hold display corresponding to a hold increase of a unit game indicated by a circle in a lower portion of the display area is received, a normal hold command is received and lit by a blue circle. When the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command to which the losing reach occurrence information is added, the blue circle of the increase in the hold of the unit game blinks. The flashing display of the hold of the unit game is shifted to the left every time the unit game being executed is completed, and is continuously displayed until the unit game is started.

  Since the transition to the advantageous game state is caused by the occurrence of the losing reach twice, the player may recognize the occurrence of the losing reach by the blinking display of the hold display and expect the transition to the advantageous gaming state. Since it is possible, the blinking display of the blue circle corresponding to the increase in the suspension also corresponds to the preceding effect display before confirmation. Also, when the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command to which the jackpot winning information is added, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled in the same manner as when the hold command to which the losing reach occurrence information is added is received. Therefore, by visually recognizing the blinking display of the blue circle, it is possible to expect the player to generate a special game state based on the jackpot winning.

  The precedent effect after the confirmation can be executed when a start winning is generated for the execution of the probable change state D. Specifically, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), a hold command to which advantageous game execution information is added is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub control board 940 when a start winning is generated, and The display content of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled according to the command. For example, as shown in FIG. 17, a hold display corresponding to the increase in the hold of the unit game indicated by a circle at the lower part of the display area is additionally displayed by a blue circle at normal times, and the sub control board 940 is advantageous. When a hold command to which game execution information is added is received, the hold display is additionally displayed in red. The red display of the unit game in red corresponds to the preceding stage display after the determination, and is shifted to the left each time the unit game being executed is completed, and is continuously displayed until the unit game is started. You. The probability change state D is continued for a plurality of times until the number of remaining unit games becomes one, and for the number of consecutive times, a hold display of a unit game in red indicating the start of execution of the probability change state D is continuously displayed. The player recognizes not only that the holding of the unit game has increased, but also recognizes that the game in the probable change state D is repeatedly executed a plurality of times, and recognizes that the start of the advantageous game state in which the small hits are continuously won. be able to. Therefore, it is expected that the blinking display of the number of remaining unit games will be started at an early stage even slightly, and a change in the mode of the remaining unit game number will be visually recognized. It is possible to enjoy the game characteristics.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 described above, in the win determination process S1403, the value of the big hit symbol random value acquired by the winning start is determined, and the transition of the probable game state after the special game state corresponding to the big hit symbol random value is obtained. The pattern is set. The transition patterns have 120 different transition patterns (patterns 1 to 120, 120) in which the timings of the probability transition states B and C among the probability transition states A to E are different, and the length of the probability transition state D performed following the probability transition state C is different. 13 (see FIG. 13). In the probable change game state, a small win win advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state is continued by a combination of a plurality of unit games executed based on the start winning of the second special symbol a plurality of times. Probable change game states including D and E are generated under the control of the main control board 920.

  In the probable change game state, the start time of the probabilistic state D is determined by the lottery reach remaining unit game number determined in accordance with the transition pattern, and the small change is continuously generated as the content of the privilege given to the player. The number of unit games in the state D is different, and the time at which the probable change state D is started after the probable change game state is started as the time for giving the privilege is also different.

  In the winning determination processing S1403, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random value corresponding to the probable change game state by each transition pattern has been acquired, and the stop symbol identification value is determined by the subsequent stop symbol generation processing S1404. Then, a stop symbol based on the stop symbol identification value is displayed by one of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol before the start of the special game state, and is stopped. A probable change game state is generated by a transition pattern according to the pattern number corresponding to the symbol identification value.

  As described above, since the transition pattern of the probable game state is determined by setting the transition pattern before the start of the probable game state, a plurality of types of continuous games constituted by unit games based on a plurality of start winnings as the probable game state are provided. It can be implemented in different ways according to the transition pattern. Further, since the start time of the probable change state D is determined by the transition pattern, it is possible to easily control the preceding effect corresponding to the start time of the probable change state D based on the number of remaining unit games predetermined according to the transition pattern. And the information on the probability change state D can be transmitted to the player in a suitable manner.

  Also, before the probable change game state is started, the information corresponding to the specific game state to be executed is displayed by any of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol. Since it is displayed, the contents that can be executed as the probable change game state are displayed by the display device mounted on the pachinko machine 100 in advance. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 100 is illegally remodeled, it becomes necessary to perform wrongdoing, including consistency between the displayed content and the start time of the probable state D, making it difficult to adjust the period of the probable state D, It is possible to efficiently suppress a fraudulent act that a person tries to gain unfairly. In particular, as described above, the display contents displayed by the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are determined by the control in which the calculation and the replacement are combined, and a large number of stop symbol identification values can be set. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally reproduce the method of generating the display content as the identification value.

  In addition, before the specific game state is started, the content and time when the privilege is given can be set in advance, and the information corresponding to the content can be shown to the player in advance, so that simply by winning one unit game. A gaming machine capable of combining a new gaming property in which a privilege is provided over a plurality of unit games compared with a gaming property in which a benefit is provided, and an effect of expecting the provision of the benefit at an early stage. Can be provided. In addition, by applying a plurality of control patterns to each unit game, it is possible to control a probable change game state constituted by a plurality of unit games, so that a small hit as a privilege given by execution of the probable change game state is provided. It is possible to easily control the size corresponding to the number of wins, the number of executions of the reach effect, and the like.

  In addition, a probable state D in which a unit game in which a privilege is more likely to be provided to a player a plurality of times than in a normal game state is continuous, and a probable state A in which a unit game in which a privilege is less likely to be provided a plurality of times than in a probable state D. -C is executed after execution. For this reason, it is possible to provide the player with not only a lottery of the unit game for each time in the probable change game state but also a gaming property that expects the early start of the probable change state D to be started later.

  In addition, before the probability change state D is started and before the start prize of the unit game in which the probability change state D is started, a holding display in green or a blinking display of the number of remaining unit games is displayed as a preceding effect display before confirmation. This indicates to the player when to start the probable change state D. Therefore, the sense of expectation for the start of the probability change state D can be increased from an earlier stage before the start winning corresponding to the unit game in the probability change state D.

  Further, before the probability change state D is started and after the start winning of the unit game in which the probability change state D is started, the post-fixing preceding effect display set in a mode different from the pre-fixing preceding effect display is set. Indicates to the player that the probable change state D has started. For this reason, as a period during which the start of the probability change state D can be definitely expected, the reservation display in red is visually recognized after the reservation display in green is visually recognized, and the probability change state D is finally started. It is possible to execute an effect of gradually increasing the sense of expectation for giving.

  In addition, after the start prize of the unit game in which the certainty change state D is started, the post-confirmation advance effect display is displayed in a mode different from the pre-determination advance effect display. For this reason, the precedent effect display is displayed at an early stage after the determination, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the award of the privilege is invalidated according to the progress of the subsequent game, or that it is difficult to generate a start winning prize, Privilege grant time information corresponding to the privilege grant time can be displayed at a suitable timing that does not cause a disadvantage such as forcing the player to consume a considerable amount of time and game balls before the privilege is granted.

  In addition, it is possible for the player to identify, by a difference in the form, that the pre-determination precedent effect display is an effect in which the game state may be changed later and is different from the post-confirmation precedent effect display. . Therefore, the game state may be changed by the jackpot winning by the start winning after the start timing of the probable change state D is suggested by the preceding effect display before the confirmation, and the starting winning is difficult. By notifying the player in advance that there is a possibility of forcing the player to consume a certain amount or more of the game ball by the time the probability change state D is started, the player is informed of the situation by the occurrence of these situations. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the person will feel dissatisfied.

  In addition, in the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), the winning random number corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined between the unit game being executed using the big hit storage flag and the unit game that has already been started and has not been executed yet. It is checked whether there is a unit game in which the value of the counter is stored, and if there is a unit game corresponding to the big hit, a normal hold command is set (the processing of S1802 in FIG. 27), and the above-described preceding effect is executed. (Specifically, each process of adding loss-reach occurrence information, advantageous game start information, advantageous game start information, advantageous game execution information, and advantageous game approach information to the hold command). ing. For this reason, with respect to the start winning that is established after the change of the gaming state is determined by the transition of the gaming state by the jackpot winning, the situation where the gaming state changes after the execution of the pre-determination preceding effect is suppressed, and the jackpot winning is determined. It is possible to execute the precedent effect after the determination only in a situation where the game state does not change.

  In addition, when a big hit is won during the probability change game state, the probability change game state shifts to the special game state before a predetermined unit game is executed 100 times. For this reason, the stop symbol identification values displayed on the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 are visually recognized to understand the transition pattern, and, for example, even if the player recognizes the occurrence of the long-term probable change state D, The progress of the game can be diversified, such as a situation where the probability change state D is not executed depending on the jackpot winning. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the content of the probability variation game state is univocally selected before the start thereof, and thereafter, the execution of the probability variation state D feels monotonous as the task of merely obtaining the number of acquired balls. Can be. In addition, the expected value of the number of obtained balls including the probable game state by the jackpot win is a large quantity corresponding to the case where all of the probable state D is executed, and the actual obtained ball when the jackpot is subsequently won. The number can be less than the expected value of the sum of all probable states D. Therefore, it is easy to set a large number of obtained balls to be expected of the player, and it is possible to set a preferable setting in which excessive gambling is suppressed. Moreover, since the game shifts to the special game state by the jackpot winning, even if at least some of the benefits expected during the certainty-change game state are not given to the player, a new special game state and a certainty-change game that can shift thereafter can be made. It is possible to give the player a sense of gain due to another privilege depending on the state, and it is possible to reduce the sense of loss that the player has.

  In the probable change state D, the fluctuation time is set to the shortest short time as compared with the other game states, and the unit game having a high probability of winning a small hit is continuously executed. For this reason, a unit game having a long ratio of possible entry into the lower large prize winning device 433 is continuously generated a plurality of times, and a privilege is efficiently provided to the player at the timing of the probable change state D during the probable change game state. Can be granted.

  By controlling the transition pattern, it is possible to control the fluctuating time in the probable changing game state, and to set the probable changing state C in which a unit game with a fluctuating time with a reach effect is easily executed as a unit game one time before the start of the probable changing state D. I have. For this reason, the execution of the reach effect is made to correspond to the timing of the award of the privilege according to the probability change state D, and the unit game that expects the time of the award of the privilege is made easier for the player to pay attention to, and the effect that suggests the time of the award of the privilege is preferably performed. Can be performed.

  In the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), when a start winning is generated during a period in which the execution of the unit game is held, the target number of times corresponding to the execution time of the unit game in which the starting winning occurs is calculated as follows. It is derived based on the remaining unit game number of the unit game being executed. For this reason, the storage area of the RAM used as the unit game number storage unit is reduced, Update synchronization may be reduced.

  In the hold information output setting process S1707 (see FIG. 27), based on the once derived target number, the game state of another number such as one before or nine after the target number is also determined. For this reason, the process of deriving the number of times required for execution determination of each effect can be summarized, and the processing load required for executing various effects can be reduced.

<Control of game balls entering specific passage TA>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35, a description will be given of a control as to whether or not the game ball enters the specific passage TA when a big hit is won in the lottery relating to the special symbol. First, the structure of the winning device unit 600 including the lower winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 for controlling whether or not a game ball can enter the specific passage TA will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The operation of the winning device unit 600 in the gaming state will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a view showing a flow-down route in a right portion of the game area. 32 is a structural explanatory view of the winning device unit 600. FIG. 32 (A) shows the configuration of the winning device unit 600 from the front side, and FIG. 32 (B) shows the ball transport device 602 in plan view. This is schematically illustrated in a state in which the state is changed. For the sake of easy understanding, in the drawings after FIG. 31, the letter “V” is attached to the position of the specific passage TA and the letter “N” is attached to the position of the non-specific passage TB as necessary. An example of a game ball flowing down the downflow path is shown by a solid line, and a downflow path of the game ball is shown by an arrow. FIG. 32 (A) shows a state in which the front cover 612 of the winning device unit 600 is removed, and FIG. 32 (B) shows the operation direction of the ball transport device 602 by an arrow, and shows the transport path KT (connection The path KD) is indicated by a dashed line, and the position of the lower large winning device 433 is indicated by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the winning device unit 600 is disposed on the front side of the game board 400 and on the lower right side of the game area. When a game is played by a right-handed game technique in which a game ball is caused to flow down from the right side of the central structure 420, the game ball is caused to flow down a flow path (a right flow path) in a right portion of a game area corresponding to the right side of the central structure 420. KR). On the right side of the gaming board 400, a combination of a row actuating device 435, a starting device 436, a starting winning device 432, an upper winning device 434, and a lower winning device 433 are provided in this order from the upstream side along the right flow path KR. ing. When the game is played by the right-handed game technique, the downflow direction of the game ball is controlled by a downflow changing member such as a nail 411 provided on the upstream side of each of the devices 432 to 436 and a wall surface of the central structure 420, and the respective devices 432. The game balls are guided to the arrangement positions of the respective devices 432 to 436 at a fixed ratio set with respect to.

  The winning device unit 600 includes a transparent synthetic resin base 611, a lower winning device 433, an upper winning device 434, a ball transfer device 602, and a distribution mechanism 601. The plurality of big prize winning devices 433 and 434 and the distribution mechanism 601 are attached to the base 611 to be integrated with the winning prize device unit 600, and then attached to the base 401 of the game board 400. A front cover 612 made of a transparent synthetic resin is attached to a front surface of the winning device unit 600 as a part of the base 611, and easily contacts a game ball flowing down inside the winning device unit 600 from the front side of the gaming board 400. The configuration is not possible. Note that the winning device unit 600 does not necessarily need to be configured by integrating a plurality of large winning devices 433, 434, 601 and a distribution mechanism 601, and some or all of the devices may be formed as separate components. The winning device unit 600 may be configured by a device attached to the base 401 and divided into a plurality of devices.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the winning device unit 600 is provided with a connection passage KD for connecting the lower winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 as a part of the right-side flow path KR. The connection passage KD is formed by the base 611 of the winning device unit 600, and a transfer passage KT that is inclined upward toward the downstream side (the direction of the arrow indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 32A) is provided in a part thereof. . The transport path KT is configured such that the game ball cannot travel to the downstream side by its own weight, and a ball transport device 602 for transporting the game ball is provided in the transport path KT. The game ball that has reached the transport passage KT can be transported by the ball transport device 602 to the diagonally upper side (the diagonally upper left side in FIG. 32 (A)) ascending as the downstream side of the right-side flow-down path KR.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the ball transfer device 602 is attached to the base 611 so as to be located on the rear side with respect to the transfer path KT, and a part of the ball transfer device 602 is formed through an opening 613 formed in the base 611. It protrudes into the transport passage KT. As shown in FIG. 32B, the ball transfer device 602 includes a rubber belt 621, a pulley 622 as a support that supports the belt 621 at a plurality of locations along a continuous direction of the transfer path KT, and a belt 621. A synthetic resin ball transfer unit 623 integrated with the belt 621 so as to protrude from the transfer path 621 toward the transfer path KT, and a transfer motor 624 (see FIG. 10) configured by a stepping motor and rotating the belt 621. ing.

  The ball transport section 623 projects into the transport path KT so as to be located above the bottom face of the transport path KT by the radius of the game ball, and the transport motor 624 operates, so that the game balls in the transport path KT are The balls are conveyed to the downstream side where the lower big winning device 433 is provided in a state where the lower side is supported diagonally one by one by the ball conveying unit 623.

  The transport motor 624 operates under the control of the main control board 920, and always operates at a constant speed after the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. The operating speed of the transport motor 624 is determined by setting the lower prize winning device 433 after a certain period of time (for example, approximately 3.0 seconds) has passed after the game ball flowing down from the installation position of the upper prize winning device 434 has passed through the connection passage KD. It is set to reach the position. Then, a predetermined time (for example, approximately 3.6 seconds) is set to the shortest flowing time (the shortest flowing time) from the installation position of the upper winning device 434 to the entrance of the specific passage TA provided inside the lower winning device 433. ), The game ball flows down.

  The operation speed of the transport motor 624 is substantially the same as or slightly shorter than the firing time interval of the game ball (for example, a short time at a rate of approximately 70% to approximately 90%) from the ball transport device 602. The game balls are set to flow down one by one individually to the downstream side where the lower large winning device 433 is located. For this reason, it is unlikely that a game ball stays on the upstream side of the ball transport device 602, and the game ball flows down at a certain interval to the downstream side by the ball transport device 602, and the lower winning device 433. When the game balls flow down along the slope in the inside of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game balls will interfere with each other, causing the speed to extremely decrease or stop.

  The distributing mechanism 601 transfers the game ball that has entered the lower special winning device 433 (that is, the game ball that has won the lower special winning opening 433A) to the non-specific passage TB formed in the internal region of the lower special winning opening 433A, or It is distributed to the specific passage TA. In the distribution mechanism 601, a plate-shaped shutter provided at an entrance portion of the specific passage TA operates by driving the switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10), so that a guiding posture allowing a game ball to enter the specific passage TA is determined. The non-guidance posture in which the game ball enters the non-specific passage TB without allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage TA can be switched. When the distribution mechanism 601 is in the non-guidance posture, the game ball that has entered the inside of the lower special winning opening 433A passes over the shutter that blocks the entrance of the specific passage TA and proceeds to the non-specific passage TB. If the distribution mechanism 601 is in the guiding posture and the entrance of the specific passage TA is open, the game ball that has entered the inside of the lower large winning opening 433A enters the specific passage TA.

  Next, the operation control of the winning device unit 600 (specifically, the lower winning device 433, the upper winning device 434, and the distribution mechanism 601) in the special game state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the operation control of the winning device unit 600. FIG. 34 is a timing chart showing main operations of the winning device unit 600. FIG. 35 is a view showing the operation of the prize device unit 600, and illustrates a main state in which the prize device unit 600 shown in FIG. 32A operates during the special game state. In FIG. 35, for ease of understanding, the lowering approach restriction mechanism 453 in the entry allowable posture and the distribution mechanism 601 in the guidance posture are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines.

  In the special game state, the operations of the lower big prize device 433, the upper big prize device 434 and the distribution mechanism 601 are controlled by the main control board 920. It is in a state where it easily occurs. The special game state includes two types, a special game state in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA, and a special game state in which a game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA. The game ball enters the specific passage TA The control of whether or not to perform the control is performed by the main control board 920.

  The state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA occurs in a part of a round composed of a plurality of rounds, and the round in which the distribution mechanism 601 operates to open the entrance of the specific passage TA (hereinafter, referred to as a round). , A specific round, which is limited to the sixth round in the present embodiment). In addition, in the specific round, whether or not the game ball enters the specific passage TA is determined after the completion of the immediately preceding round (fifth round in the present embodiment) executed before the specific round (the fifth round). This is realized by changing the time (interval time) until the sixth round) is started.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the special game state, control is performed such that game balls can enter the specific path TA with different probabilities depending on the type of the special symbol that has won the big hit. In the case of the winning related to the first special symbol, the game ball can enter the specific passage TA in a part of the long-term (16 rounds) special game state having a large number of continuous rounds (long-term B in FIG. 22), and the remaining In the special game state of the short game (short-term A and short-term B in FIG. 22) and a part of the long-term special game state (long-term A in FIG. 22) in which the number of continuous rounds is short. The setting is such that the game ball cannot enter the passage TA. The probability of occurrence of a special game state in which game balls can enter the specific passage TA is determined by the winning ratio of these special game states, and this probability is set to 50%. In the case of the winning related to the second special symbol, the special game in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA in both the short-term and long-term special game states having different continuous round numbers. The probability that a state will occur is set to 100%.

  In the special game state, only a part is different depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific passage TA, and the control which is mostly common is performed. In the following, the control of the long-term special game state will be exemplified. A 16 round jackpot (hereinafter, referred to as “16R jackpot (V prize)”) in which game balls can enter the specific passage TA, and a 16 round jackpot (hereinafter, “16R jackpot (V non- An example of the control for “)” will be described. Regarding the six round big hits with a short continuous round number, the seventh and subsequent rounds are omitted from the 16 round big hits, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  When the "16R big hit (V winning)" occurs, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper big winning device 434 is the same in each round from the first round to the fourth round and from the seventh round to the 16th round. The operation is performed according to the open pattern (continuous open) and the end condition. Each round is started when the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the upper winning prize device 434 takes an allowable entry posture in which a game ball can enter the inside of the upper prize winning device 434, and the allowable entry posture is set during each round. Continue (see FIG. 35A).

  In each round, a predetermined allowable number (for example, 8) of game balls as a condition for ending the round is detected by the upper winning switch 444, or a maximum allowable time from the start of the round (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture by the control of the main control board 920 with the satisfaction of this end condition. The winning award winning device 434 is provided with a winning opening (upper winning award 434A) that is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape on the rear side of the right-side downflow path KR. The upper winning hole 434A is opened and closed by a plate-like lid member that closes the winning opening 434A, thereby controlling whether a game ball can enter the upper winning hole 434A. The interval time from the end of each round to the start of the next round is basically set to a fixed time (for example, 2.0 seconds), and only the time immediately before the specific round is changed by the game ball to the specific path TA. Different times are set depending on whether entry is possible or not.

  The fifth round in the “16R jackpot (V winning)” is identical to the previous rounds (first to fourth rounds) in that the upper winning award device 434 is in a permissible approach position, The difference is that the end condition of the round is different so that the time of the approach allowable posture becomes longer. Specifically, the allowable number of entries in the fifth round is set to a number (for example, 10) different from the first to fourth rounds, and the game balls flow down the right-hand flow path KR by the right-handed game technique. If the game ball has been fired, the fifth round ends at a timing different from the first to fourth rounds. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the normal launching operation in which the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching device 330 at a fixed launch time interval (approximately 0.6 seconds) and the launch is continued by the right-handed gaming technique In the first to fourth rounds, each round ends in the time (approximately 4.8 seconds) obtained by multiplying the launch time interval by the allowable number of rounds, and the fifth round is more than the previous rounds The round ends after a long time elapses until a number of prizes are generated.

  Here, the player who wants to suppress the consumption of the game balls even a little wins the upper prize winning opening 434A by the number (8) corresponding to the allowable number of the game balls in each round, and during the subsequent rounds. In an attempt to reduce the number of game balls heading to the discharge port 401A as much as possible during the interval time without going to the prize, the game balls may be intermittently fired aiming only at the timing when the prize occurs. When the intermittent launch of the game ball is performed immediately before the sixth round corresponding to the specific round, the lower large winning device 433 and the distribution mechanism in the specific round so that the game ball can enter the specific path TA. Even if the operation of the game ball 601 is controlled, the game ball may not enter the specific path TA, and the player may invalidate the right to obtain the surely changed game state and may suffer disadvantages.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the end condition of the fifth round is set differently from the previous round. Therefore, if the player who performs the intermittent firing operation fires game balls every eight balls in the same manner as in the fourth round, the fifth round is not ended. This suggests to the player that the situation from the fifth round to the sixth round is different from the situation before that, and prompts the player to fire the game ball again toward the end of the fifth round, It is possible to increase the possibility of continuing the launch of the game ball until the sixth round. For example, it is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 by displaying information such as characters and graphics that the V winning is invalid unless the game ball is fired until the sixth round, so that it is difficult for the player to overlook it. You can. As a result, in the specific round (the sixth round), the launch of the game ball in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA is promoted, and the possibility that the player invalidates the right to generate the certain-variable game state is reduced. can do.

  Note that the end condition of the fifth round may be set to end in a shorter time until the fourth round. In this case, additional game balls are fired by the same firing operation as in the fourth round, so that the game balls can flow down to the specific path TA after the fifth round. The end condition of the fifth round may be set the same as that of the fourth round. In this case, it is preferable that the end control of the fifth round can be shared with the fourth round.

  From the fifth round to the sixth round of the “16R jackpot (V winning)”, as shown in FIG. 34A, a long time has elapsed since the end of the fifth round (“5R” in FIG. 34A). After an interval time (long interval), a sixth round (“6R” in FIG. 34A) is started. During the fifth round, the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is turned on, and the game ball that arrives in front of the upper prize winning device 434 enters the upper prize entrance 434A (see FIG. 35A). For this reason, during the fifth round, the game ball does not flow down to the connection passage KD, and there is a period in which the game ball does not flow down to the lower big prize device 433 provided with the specific passage TA (flow down period) (FIG. 34). (A)).

  In the fifth round, when the entry of the permissible number (10) of game balls into the upper-level winning opening 434A is detected by the upper-level winning switch 444, the fifth round ends, and the upper-level entry restriction solenoid 464 is turned off. (Time t1). When the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is turned off, the game ball that arrives in front of the upper prize winning device 434 does not win in the upper prize winning opening 434A, and the game ball flows downward in front of the upper prize winning device 434. The period in which the game ball can flow down to the lower big winning device 433 where the specific passage TA is provided (flowable period). This flowable period continues until the seventh round is started and opening of the upper winning award 434A is started.

  During the long interval from the fifth round to the sixth round, the game ball flowing in front of the upper winning device 434 after the end of the fifth round is placed after the start of the sixth round and the distribution mechanism 601 is in the guiding posture. Is set to a time during which the vehicle can reach the entrance of the specific passage TA during a certain period of time, for example, 3.0 seconds. During the long interval, the game ball that has flowed in front of the upper winning device 434 after the end of the fifth round advances toward the entrance side of the specific passage TA, and the game ball is conveyed in the conveyance passage KT. Flows down through the connection passage KD including.

  As described above, the shortest flow time (for example, 3.6 seconds) is required to reach the entrance of the specific passage TA via the connection passage KD. For this reason, the time at which the shortest flow time has elapsed since the end of the inability to flow down to the specific path TA side in the fifth round (time t2) is defined as the shortest time (the shortest possible time of entry), and the game ball enters the specific path TA at the entrance. Is reached, and when the distribution mechanism 601 is controlled so as to include a certain period after the shortest possible period of entry, an entry period in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA occurs. The lower entry control solenoid 463 is turned on before the shortest possible entry period to start the sixth round, and after the start of the sixth round, the game balls can flow down to the distribution mechanism 601 side.

  Here, the length of the non-flowable period in the fifth round is substantially equal to the time (6.0 seconds) obtained by multiplying the allowable number (10) into the upper winning award 434A in the fifth round by the firing time interval. The length of the non-flow-down period is set longer than the shortest flow-down time (3.6 seconds). Therefore, when the fifth round is completed and the sixth round is started, there is no game ball between the upper and lower winning openings 433A and 434A corresponding to the connection passage KD. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball that has passed in front of the upper winning award 434A in the interval time before the execution of the fifth round is directed to the specific path TA after the end of the fifth round. The length of the non-flowing period in the fifth round may be set to be at least twice as long as the firing time interval of the game ball with respect to the shortest flow time in consideration of the variation of the flow time of the game ball. It is preferable that the time interval is set to be at least four times the firing time interval.

  After the elapse of the long interval after the end of the fifth round, the sixth round starts. When the sixth round is started, no game balls exist in the connection path KD, and the game balls following the last entry into the upper winning award opening 434A in the fifth round move upward toward the specific path TA. It passes in front of the special winning opening 434A and proceeds downstream.

  In the sixth round, the lower large winning device 433 and the distribution mechanism 601 operate. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34A, the sixth round is started with the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 turned on and the lower big winning device 433 takes an entry allowable posture, and FIG. As shown in the figure, during the sixth round, a game ball can enter the lower big winning opening 433A. Until a certain period (for example, 3.0 seconds) elapses from the start of the sixth round, the switching solenoid 465 is turned on, the distribution mechanism 601 is in the guiding posture, and the game ball enters the specific passage TA. It is possible.

  Here, in the sixth round, the switching solenoid 465 is set so as to include a period after the shortest approachable time, and during a certain period (3.0 seconds) slightly before and after the shortest available time. Turned on. For this reason, if the game balls continue to be fired before the end of the fifth round, the game balls following the last entry into the upper winning award opening 434A in the fifth round advance toward the specific passage TA and are specified. Detected by passage switch 448. The lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the switching solenoid 465 take a state in which a game ball can enter at least the specific passage TA after the shortest entry possible period, and generate an entry possible period, whereby the “16R jackpot (V prize)” , A game ball enters the specific passage TA, and a V prize is generated.

  Further, in the sixth round, the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the switching solenoid 465 operate to allow a game ball to enter the specific passage TA from the lower large prize device 433 (hereinafter, an entry possible formation period). ) (3.0 seconds) is set shorter than the time (6.0 seconds) obtained by multiplying the allowable number (10) of entering the upper winning award opening 434A in the fifth round by the firing time interval. ing. As a result, a period in which the game ball does not advance to the specific passage TA in the non-flowable period in the fifth round is generated, and during the period in which the game ball does not advance to the specific passage TA due to the non-flowable period, “16R In the "big hit (V non-winning)", an accessible formation period is generated. For this reason, in the situation where the entrance to the lower large winning opening 433A and the specific passage TA is open at the "16R big hit (V non-winning)", the game ball does not reach the entrance to the lower large winning opening 433A and goes to the specific passage TA. Can make the game ball inaccessible. Therefore, the non-flowable period in the fifth round needs to be set to be sufficiently longer than the length of the accessible formation period in consideration of variations in the flow time of the game balls, and is twice as long as the firing time interval of the game balls. (0.6 seconds) or more, preferably 4 times (2.4 seconds) or more.

  When a predetermined period (3.0 seconds) as an approachable formation period elapses from the start of the sixth round, the switching solenoid 465 is turned off while the lower approach restriction solenoid 463 remains on, and the approachable period ends. The game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening 433A is guided to the non-specific passage TB (see FIG. 35C), and is detected by the non-specific passage switch 447. The winning of the game ball to the lower large winning opening 433A is detected by the lower large winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10) provided near the entrance of the lower large winning opening 433A, and the allowable number of the entering (eight) gaming balls is lowered. The sixth round ends when the player enters the special winning opening 433A or when the maximum allowable time has elapsed since the start of the round.

  In the seventh and subsequent rounds, the upper prize winning device 434 again takes the allowable entry posture (see FIG. 33), and a predetermined allowable number (eight) of game balls wins a large prize similarly to the first to fourth rounds. Each round ends when the switch 443 detects it or when the maximum allowable time elapses from the start of the round.

  The round progresses to the final round (16th round) in “16R jackpot (V winning)”, and the special game state ends when the number of game balls allowed to enter (8 balls) enters the big win device 434 in the 16th round. I do. In the special game state of "16R jackpot (V prize)", if the launch of the game ball by the right-handed game technique is continued during the special game state, the game ball always enters the specific passage TA. The probability of entry is 100%. After the end of the special game state, the game ball enters the specific passage TA during the special game state and a V prize is generated, so that the certain change game state is started.

  The “16R big hit (V winning)” differs from the “16R big hit (V winning)” only in the interval time from the end of the fifth round to the start of the sixth round, and the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434 are different. The special game state progresses according to the same conditions as other conditions such as the open pattern (continuous release) and the round end condition. Therefore, hereinafter, only the point that “16R big hit (V non-winning)” is different from “16R big hit (V winning)” will be described. In addition, regarding the operation of the upper entry control solenoid 464 and the timing of detecting the game ball by the upper winning switch 444 from the fifth round to the sixth round, “16R big hit (V non-winning)” and “16R big hit (V winning)” Are omitted in FIG. 34B.

  In the “16R big hit (V non-winning)”, as shown in FIG. 34B, the sixth round starts after a short short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the fifth round. , The switching solenoid 465 is turned on until the predetermined time (3.0 seconds) elapses from the start of the lower winning award device 433, and the distribution mechanism 601 closes the entrance of the specific passage TA. It is assumed that the guidance posture is open.

  The game ball that has flowed in front of the upper winning device 434 after the end of the fifth round in the “16R jackpot (V non-winning)” has passed the shortest flow time (3.6 seconds) from the end of the fifth round ( If it does not come after the shortest possible time of entry), it does not reach the position where the distribution mechanism 601 is provided. The period during which the distributing mechanism 601 takes the guiding posture is a fixed time (3.0 seconds) from the start of the sixth round, as in the case of “16R big hit (V winning)”. In the "big hit (V non-winning)", the time length of the short interval is set so that the switching solenoid 465 is turned off at a timing earlier than the shortest possible time of entry. For this reason, after the end of the fifth round, when the game ball enters the lower big prize winning device 433 and reaches the distribution mechanism 601, the entrance of the specific passage TA is closed (see FIG. 35C), and the game is performed. The sphere is guided to the non-specific passage TB.

  In the “16R big hit (V non-winning)”, the round progresses to the final round, and the special game state ends when the allowable number of game balls enter the upper-level winning device 434. In the “16R jackpot (V non-winning)”, the probability that the game ball can enter the specific passage TA during the special game state cannot be entered, and the probability that the game ball can enter the specific passage TA is 0%. When the special game state is completed, a non-V-winning in which no game ball has entered the specific passage TA during the special game state causes a time-saving game state having a lower value for the player than the certainty-variable game state to be started.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100, when the winning condition for winning the jackpot is established, a special game state in which a plurality of (16) rounds are combined occurs, and the specific round (the sixth round) in the special game state is generated. When the game ball enters the specific path TA in the round), a more stable game state is generated, which is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific path TA, and the generation of the certain game state is controlled by the main control board 920. Controlled by the difference in interval time. Therefore, a control pattern for permitting or rejecting a game ball to enter the specific passage TA for a plurality of types of special game states can be shared except for the interval time, so that control can be simplified and the specific passage can be reduced. The probability of the game ball entering the TA can be easily varied. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the probability of a game ball entering the specific passage TA which affects the transition of the game state while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 100.

  Also, in the specific round (sixth round), an upper-college winning device 434 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601 that can take a guiding posture in which the entrance to the specific passage TA is opened, and is provided immediately before the specific round. In a round (fifth round), a game ball whose traveling direction is controlled by the upper-level winning device 434 has a predetermined number (8) of detection units (predetermined areas) of the upper-level winning switch 444 provided inside the upper-level winning opening 434A. ), The end condition of the immediately preceding round is satisfied, and thereafter, the distribution mechanism 601 is controlled to the guiding posture, and the specific round is started. Therefore, in the round immediately before the specific round, the flow of the game ball on the right-side flow path KR leading to the specific path TA can be controlled by the operation of the upper-large winning device 434, and the distribution mechanism 601 and the lower-large winning in the specific round. Even if the operation control of the device 433 is the same, it is possible to vary the length of the interval time (standby time) before the start of the specific round, thereby making the probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA different.

  In addition, when the sixth round as a specific round is started, the distribution mechanism 601 straddles before and after the timing at which the game ball reaches the distribution mechanism 601 that is set to be in an enterable state in the specific round. As the control for continuing the firing of the game balls so that the game ball can be reached, the allowable number of approach in the fifth round is set to a different number from the previous round. The main control board 920 performs the control for changing the allowable number of entries, so that when the specific round is started, before the timing at which the game ball reaches the distribution mechanism 601 that is set to be in the entry-enabled state in the specific round. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to continue the launch of the game ball so as to reach the distribution mechanism 601 after straddling the timing. For this reason, the player intentionally stops firing the game ball at a timing when it is necessary to continue firing the game ball in the special game state, and the game is distributed to the distribution mechanism 601 which is brought into a state in which the game ball can enter in a specific round. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball does not reach and the player suffers disadvantage.

  In addition, in order to continue launching the game ball so as to be able to reach the distribution mechanism 601 from before the timing when the game ball arrives at the distribution mechanism 601 that can be entered in a specific round and reach after the timing. The control is not limited to the configuration in which the allowable number of entries in the fifth round is different from that in the previous round, but is realized by another control instead of, or in addition to, the control in which the allowable number of entries is changed. You may. For example, the interval time before execution of the immediately preceding round (fifth round) executed immediately before a specific round (sixth round) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and compared with the short time. Thus, a special game state in which the interval time before execution of one or more rounds executed before the immediately preceding round is set to a long time (for example, 2 seconds) may be generated. Thus, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation in which the game balls are continuously consumed and wasteful game balls are not consumed is small, and the shooting balls can be easily fired. In this case, it is preferable that the short interval time set as the immediately preceding round is set to a time shorter than the firing time interval of the game balls, because it is possible to efficiently suppress wasteful consumption of the game balls. .

  In addition, the present invention is provided for continuing the firing of the game balls so as to be able to reach the distribution mechanism 601 by straddling before and after the timing at which the game balls reach the distribution mechanism 601 which can be entered in the specific round. As a control, the progress of the special game state is common up to the middle of the previous round with respect to the special game state that generates a specific round, and the player can play the game by continuing to launch the game ball for a long time in the previous round. Another kind of special game state that can obtain a value may be generated. For example, with respect to “16R jackpot (V winning)”, the winning device operates according to the same operation pattern and operation end condition as the specific round until the middle of the round immediately before the specific round. (V prize) ”, the allowable number of entry is large so that a larger number of game balls can enter the prize device, or the maximum permissible entry time of“ 16R big hit (V prize) ”is short (for example, 4.2 seconds). ), A special game state in which the maximum allowable time (for example, 6.0 seconds) longer than that time may be generated.

  Next, a case where a power failure occurs in a specific round in the special game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 100, a ball transfer device 602 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601 capable of generating a state in which a game ball can enter the specific path TA. When a power failure occurs, the ball transport device 602 retains a game ball that has flowed down the transport path KT as a downflow path leading to the specific path TA in the transport path KT as a predetermined range. Has functions.

  Specifically, the transport motor 624 operates at a constant speed under the control of the main control board 920, and when a power failure occurs, power supply to the transport motor 624 is stopped and the transport motor 624 is stopped. A power outage occurred in a situation where a game ball that was supposed to pass through the specific passage TA is flowing down the down flow path (transportation passage KT) leading to the specific passage TA (that is, within the interval time from the fifth round to the sixth round). In such a case, the game ball can be held in the transfer path KT by the ball transfer device 602.

  After the power of the pachinko machine 100 is restored, the control of the special game state by the main control board 920 proceeds, and the control before the power failure is restarted, and the flow of the game ball toward the specific passage TA in accordance with the progress of the control. Is resumed. For this reason, in the special game state of the 16R big hit (V winning), it is possible to generate a situation where the game ball enters the specific passage TA, as in the case where no power failure occurs. That is, when a power failure occurs within the interval time from the fifth round to the sixth round, if there is no sphere holding function at the time of the power failure, the game ball reaches the entrance of the specific passage TA even if the game ball is quickly fired after the power is restored. Although the specific path TA is previously in a state where it cannot enter and cannot be made in time, such a situation can be avoided by holding the game balls in the transport path KT by the power-off-time ball holding function. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a player who has properly played a game due to an unexpected situation suffers a disadvantage.

  In addition, the ball transfer device 602 is capable of holding game balls at a plurality of places where the ball transfer unit 623 can support the game balls along the transfer path KT in the transfer path KT as a flow-down path leading to the specific path TA. The game balls can be held at a plurality of locations in the transport path KT. For this reason, when a power failure occurs at a timing when some of the game balls held in the transfer passage KT can enter the specific passage TA, the game balls are held at a plurality of locations in the transfer passage KT and specified before the power failure. The game balls that have been able to enter the passage TA can be made to enter the specific passage TA, and other game balls can be prevented from entering the specific passage TA. Further, in the special game state of the 16R big hit (V non-winning), since the flow of the game ball can be prevented at the most upstream end of the transport passage KT, during the short interval from the fifth round to the sixth round. When a power failure occurs, the game ball is held on the upstream side sufficiently separated from the specific path TA so that the game ball does not reach the specific path TA in a state where the specific path TA can enter. can do. Thus, the state of whether or not the game ball flows down to the specific passage TA corresponding to the transition control of the game state determined before the power failure is stored in the game area, and the flow of the game ball is restored after the power is restored. It can be easier.

  Further, on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601, there is provided an upper prize winning device 434 capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the specific passage TA side. The game balls are held in the transport passage KT located downstream and upstream of the distribution mechanism 601. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently retain the game balls heading to the specific passage TA only during the power outage by restricting the game balls to the distribution mechanism 601 side by the upper prize winning device 434, and the game state determined before the power outage. Of the game sphere corresponding to the transition control can be efficiently restored after the power failure. Here, when the configuration is such that the game balls are held upstream of the upper prize winning device 434, the game spheres are stopped in the right-side downflow route KR including the game spheres that enter the upper prize winning device 434. Will be done. If game balls that are not involved in the entry of the specific passage TA are to be held in the game area during a power failure, the possibility of unexpected misconduct or the like also increases. Therefore, in order to exhibit the ball holding function only for the minimum required game balls, it is preferable to provide the ball holding function at the time of a power failure on the downstream side of the upper prize winning device 434.

  Also, the ball transporting device 602 exhibits a ball holding function at the time of a power failure even in a special game state in which the ball should not enter the specific passage TA, saves the situation before the power failure, and enters the game ball into the specific passage TA after the power failure. Can be disabled. In this case, it is preferable that an anti-fraud function be provided so that the position where the game ball is held is not illegally moved. For example, the front cover 612 may be provided as a part of the base 611 of the winning device unit 600. By covering the transport passage KT, unauthorized contact for moving the holding position of the game ball is prevented.

  In addition, as the fraud prevention function, another configuration may be provided instead of the front cover 612 or in addition to the front cover 612. For example, the belt 621 is rotated by a sensor that detects the rotation position of the belt 621. The position is backed up when a power failure occurs, and control is performed to confirm the position of the belt 621 in the processing at the time of start-up after power recovery. If the rotational position has moved, it is determined that an error has occurred. The main control board 920 may perform a predetermined process, such as a process of adding a fixed penalty such as invalidating the function, to provide a fraud prevention function.

  Further, the ball holding function at the time of power failure has a ball holding function of holding the game ball not only on the upstream side of the lower big prize device 433 but also on the downstream side closer to the distribution mechanism 601 than the entrance of the lower big prize device 433. This case is preferable because the situation before the power failure can be saved in more detail and restored after the power is restored.

  Next, control regarding the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA when a predetermined abnormal firing state occurs in the special game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 100, in the special game state of the 16R big hit (V prize) in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, whether or not the firing of the game ball by the firing device 330 is abnormal is abnormal. Control to detect and detect the abnormal firing state, stop the progress of the game by temporarily stopping the special game state, and then, when the abnormal firing state is released, control the game that has stopped its progress An abnormality handling control function for performing the operation is provided.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is provided with a right strike detection switch 603 as an abnormality handling control function in an upstream portion of the game area. The right-handed detection switch 603 is provided at a position where all the game balls to be passed by the right-handed game technique executed in the special game state can be detected. This right strike detection switch 603 is constituted by a non-contact type sensor for detecting the passage of a game ball, and is connected to the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10).

  In addition, the main control board 920 is provided with a timer update process S1210 of the main control board 920, an upper-win winning permitted process S1309, and an upper-win winning prohibited process S1310, as processes for the abnormality handling control function. These processes are stored in a ROM (not shown) as a part of the control program of the main control board 920. Hereinafter, the abnormality handling control by the main control board 920 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the timer update processing S1210 of the main control board 920. In the timer update process S1210, it is determined whether or not the suspension flag is set (S2001). If the suspension flag is not set (S2001: N), a process of updating the special symbol related control timer is executed. (S2002). On the other hand, if the temporary stop flag is not set, the process proceeds to S2003 without updating the special symbol related control timer. In the process of S2003, the timer other than the special symbol related control timer is updated, and the timer updating process ends.

  Here, the pause flag is set when the launch of the game ball is not normally performed by the right-handed game technique at a timing that affects whether the game ball can enter a specific area in a specific round including a specific round. And is a flag which is turned on by the main control board 920. The on / off switching of the suspension flag will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process during an upper-win winning process S1309 of the main control board 920, and FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an upper-win winning process S1310 during the main control board 920. The upper winning award winning allowed processing S1309 and the upper winning a prize prohibited processing S1310 are stored in the ROM of the main control board 920 as a part of the special symbol related processing S1217 constituting a part of the main control interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). It is remembered.

  The upper winning award winning process S1309 is a process for generating a special game state, and starts the round in which the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 takes an entry allowable posture so that a game ball can enter the upper winning award opening 434A. It is executed from the timing until the end of the round. In the upper winning award winning allowed processing S1309, the start is set at the end of the processing corresponding to the opening period by the big winning apparatus operation start processing S1306 (see FIG. 18), and the first round is started. The upper winning award winning process S1309 is performed after the operation of the lower winning award device 433 or the upper winning device 434 is prohibited by the lower winning a prize inhibiting process S1308 or the upper winning prize inhibiting process S1310 (see FIG. 18). Even if the interval time has elapsed in the situation described above, the start setting is performed when the next round is started. The setting of the start of the upper winning a prize allowable processing S1309 is set in the special prize related processing referred to in the special symbol related processing S1217 in the big prize winning device operation start processing S1306, the lower big prize prohibited prohibition processing S1308, or the upper prize winning prohibited processing S1310. This is performed by updating the value of the state identification value.

  In the upper winning award winning process S1309, first, it is determined whether or not a suspension flag is set (S2101). If the suspension flag is not set (S2101: N), a flag before a specific round is set. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S2102). The flag before the specific round affects whether or not the game ball can enter the specific passage TA during a certain period including a part of the specific round (sixth round) in which the distribution mechanism 601 operates and the entrance of the specific passage TA is opened. This flag is set (turned on) at the timing (hereinafter, referred to as a specific passage side progression period), and is configured by a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  In the process of S2102, if the flag before the specific round is not set (S2102: N), the situation is before or after the specific passage-side traveling period. In this case, it is determined whether or not it is the immediately preceding round (fifth round) of the specific round (S2103). If it is the immediately preceding round (S2103: Y), the allowable number of entries in this round is “3”. Is determined (S2104). In the immediately preceding round, the game balls fired after the allowable entry number becomes “3” are the game balls that may possibly enter the specific passage TA in the pachinko machine 100, The flag before the specific round is set at the timing when the allowable number becomes “3”.

  In the process of S2104, when the allowable entry number is determined to be “3” (S2104: Y), a flag before the specific round is set, and the process proceeds to S2115. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2103 that the current round is not the round immediately before the specific round (S2103: N), or in the processing of S2104, it is the round immediately before the specific round but the allowable entry number is still “4” or more. If it has been performed (S2104: N), the process of S2105 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2115.

  In the process of S2102, when it is determined that the flag before the specific round is set (S2102: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the right hit detection switch 603 (S2106), and the right hit is performed. If the game ball has passed through the detection switch 603 (S2106: Y), the firing stop time measurement counter is reset (S2107). The firing stop time measurement counter is a counter for measuring a time during which the game ball does not flow down the right-side downflow path KR during the specific passage-side traveling period, and is configured by a part of the RAM of the main control board 920. .

  In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the right strike detection switch 603 (S2106: N), the firing stop time measurement counter is incremented by "1" and updated (S2108). The upper winning award winning processing S1309 is executed in the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 920, and is executed at regular intervals (2 ms). For this reason, in a situation in which the right-side downflow route KR does not flow down during the specific passage-side traveling period, the firing stop time measurement counter is added and updated by “1” every 2 ms.

  After the processing in S2108, it is determined whether or not the firing stop time measurement counter has reached a value (“3000 or more”) corresponding to no passing of the game ball for 6.0 seconds or more as the abnormal firing state (S2109), and 6 If it is determined that there is no passage of 0.0 seconds or more (S2109: Y), a temporary stop flag is set (S2110), the operation of the upper entry control solenoid 464 is released, and the game ball cannot enter the upper winning entry 434A. Is performed (S2111). Thus, the preparation for temporarily stopping the progress of the special game state in the round immediately before the specific round is completed. In the situation where the pause flag is set, as described above, the update process of the special symbol related control timer is skipped in the timer update process S1210, and the special symbol related control timer is maintained at the same value. The progress of the special game state is temporarily stopped.

  In the processing of S2101, when it is determined that the pause flag is set (S2101: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the right strike detection switch 603 (S2112). In the process of S2112, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the right strike detection switch 603 (S2112: N), the process of S2113 and S2114 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2115.

  In the process of S2112, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the right strike detection switch 603 (S2112: Y), a process of releasing (turning off) the pause flag is executed (S2113), and After the entry control solenoid 464 is returned to the operating state and the game ball can enter the upper winning award 434A (S2114), the process proceeds to S2115. Here, if the game ball has passed the right strike detection switch 603 in a situation where the pause flag has been set, the abnormal launching state has been released. In this case, the processing of S2113 and S2114 The execution restarts the progress of the special game state that has been paused in the round immediately before the specific round.

  In the processing after S2115, first, an allowable entry number updating process S2115 for updating the allowable entry number is executed. In the allowable entry number updating process S2115, a counter corresponding to the allowable entry number (a part of the RAM of the main control board 920) at a timing when the upper-prize-winning switch 444 detects that the gaming ball has entered the upper-prize winning opening 434A. Is updated to a value obtained by subtracting the winning amount of one ball.

  After the processing in S2115, it is determined whether or not it is time to release the special symbol related control timer (S2116). Before the start of each round and interval, a value corresponding to the time length of the round and the interval is set in the special symbol-related control timer, and in the timer updating process, the timer is updated until the time elapses (for example, by subtracting the value). The timer is updated (updated), and is constituted by a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  In the processing of S2116, if the special symbol-related control timer has been released (S2116: Y), it is the timing when the maximum allowable time has elapsed in the running round, so that the operation of the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is released. A round end setting process for prohibiting the entry of the game ball into the upper prize winning device 434 and performing a setting to shift to the next period is executed (S2118), and then the upper prize winning permitted process S1309 is ended.

  In the process of S2116, if the special symbol-related control timer has not been released (S2116: N), it is determined whether or not the allowable number of entries in the running round is “0” (S2117). If there is any (S2117: Y), it is the timing of the end of the round, so the flow shifts to the round end setting process (S2118). If the allowable entry number is equal to or more than “1” in the processing of S2115 (S2117: N), it is the timing to continue the round that is still being executed, so the round end setting processing S2118 is skipped, and the upper-large-prize winning allowable processing is performed. S1309 is terminated.

  Here, in the round end setting processing S2118, if the first round to the fifteenth round in which the next round remains in the special game state is ended, the value of the special symbol related state identification value is set to the upper-prize winning prohibition processing. The value is updated to “7” corresponding to S1310, and the setting for shifting to the interval time is performed (see FIG. 18). On the other hand, if the 16th round has ended, the value of the special symbol related state identification value is updated to a value “8” corresponding to the special winning device operation stop processing S1311 (see FIG. 18) for shifting to the ending period. You. In the round end setting process S2118, the value of the special symbol related control timer is set to a value corresponding to the length of the interval time or the ending period. Immediately before the specific round, the setting of the interval time having a different length corresponding to a plurality of types of special game states is performed by referring to the stop symbol identification value corresponding to the type of the special game state in the round end setting process S2118. Done.

  The upper winning a prize prohibition process S1310 is a process executed during the interval time after the operation of the upper prize winning device 434 is prohibited, and is performed during the fifth to sixth rounds immediately before the specific round. This is a process executed during the interval period.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the upper winning a prize prohibition process S1310, first, it is determined whether or not a suspension flag is set (S2201), and if the suspension flag is not set (S2201: N). Then, it is determined whether or not the specific pre-round flag is set (S2202). The flag before the specific round is set when the upper-winning-prize-winning processing S1309 is executed in the round (fifth round) immediately before the specific round (the sixth round), so that the flag before the specific round is set. Is an interval period immediately before a specific round (hereinafter, also referred to as an immediately preceding interval period), and if not set, is another interval period.

  In the process of S2202, if the flag before the specific round is not set (S2202: N), the process is not the immediately preceding interval period, and the processes of S2203 to S2211 required for the immediately preceding interval period are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2231. .

  In the process of S2202, if the flag before the specific round is set (S2202: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the right hit detection switch 603 (S2203), and the right hit detection switch 603 is turned on. Is passed (S2203: Y), the firing stop time measurement counter is reset, and the process proceeds to S2208.

  In the processing of S2203, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the right strike detection switch 603 (S2203: N), the firing stop time measurement counter is incremented by "1" and updated (S2205). It is determined whether or not there is no passing of the game ball for 6.0 seconds or more by the later firing stop time measurement counter (S2206), and when it is determined that there is no passing for 6.0 seconds or more (S2206: Y), the pause is performed. The flag is set (S2207), and the process proceeds to S2208.

  In the processing of S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the interval time measurement counter has reached a value corresponding to 1.0 second or more (S2208). The interval time measurement counter is a counter for measuring an elapsed time from the start of the immediately preceding interval, and is constituted by a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  In the processing of S2208, if the value of the interval time measurement counter does not correspond to 1.0 second or more (S2208: N), it is not 1.0 second or more but less than 1.0 second after the start of the immediately preceding interval. is there. In this case, the interval time counter is updated (for example, added and updated by “1”) (S2209), and the process shifts to S2231.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2208, if the value of the interval time measurement counter is equal to or more than 1.0 second (S2208: Y), it means that 1.0 second or more has elapsed after the start of the immediately preceding interval. In this case, the interval measurement counter is reset (S2210), the flag before the specific round is released (S2211), and the process shifts to S2231.

  In the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the pause flag is set (S2201: Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the right strike detection switch 603 (S2221). In the process of S2221, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the right strike detection switch 603 (S2221: N), the process of S2222 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2231.

  In the process of S2221, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the right strike detection switch 603 (S2221: Y), a process of canceling (turning off) the pause flag is executed (S2222), and the process proceeds to S2231. Move to.

  In the processing of S2231, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the special symbol-related control timer has been canceled (S2231). If the special symbol-related control timer has not been canceled (S2231: N), the interval period is continued. Therefore, the process of S2232 is skipped, and the upper-winning-prize winning prohibited process S1310 ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2231 that it is the timing at which the special symbol related control timer has been canceled (S2231: Y), it is the timing to end the interval and start the next round. After executing the round start setting process for performing the setting for shifting (S2232), the process for prohibiting the winning of a big win S1310 is ended.

  Here, the operation of the pachinko machine 100 when the abnormal firing state occurs will be described. In the pachinko machine 100, if a situation occurs in which the game ball cannot be fired during the special game state of the 16R jackpot (V prize), the game ball does not enter the specific path TA and should occur after the special game state. Players will not be able to receive benefits due to the oddly changing game state. The abnormal launching state of the game ball can occur under various conditions such as clogging of the ball at the entrance of the game area, failure of the launching device 330, or trouble in supplying the game ball to the pachinko machine 100. In the situation where this kind of abnormal firing condition occurs, if a possible entry period in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA occurs, the state changes to a certain-variable gaming state obtained by winning the lottery related to the special design with a special angle. The opportunity to enjoy the game value of the transition may be invalidated, and the player may be disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the round immediately before the specific round in the special game state is started, and when the allowable number of entry becomes “3” as the remaining time of the round, The flag before the specific round is set. When the flag before the specific round is set, the flow of the game ball on the right-hand flow path KR is monitored by checking the state of the right-handing detection switch 603 in the upper-level winning permitted processing S1309 and the upper-level winning prohibited processing S1310. (Process of S2106 and S2203).

  In the situation where the flag before the specific round is set, if the right strike detection switch 603 does not detect the passing of the game ball for a predetermined time (6.0 seconds) or more, the pause flag is set and the special game state is set. Progress is stopped. The progress stoppage of the special game state is performed by canceling the operation during the operation of the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 without performing the update process of the special symbol related control timer (S2111).

  The situation in which the pause flag is set is released when it is detected that the game ball passes through the right strike detection switch 603. Thereby, the progress of the special game state is resumed in a situation where the launch of the game ball is executed again. In the immediately preceding round and the immediately preceding interval of the specific round, the suspension of the special game state by setting the pause flag can be executed, and a situation occurs in which the game ball does not head to the specific passage TA at the start of the specific round. It becomes difficult to do.

  As described above, when the special game state of the 16R big hit (V prize) occurs, when the game ball is in the abnormal firing state in which the game ball is not normally fired, at least a part of the progress of the game is stopped. For this reason, it is easy to avoid a situation in which a game ball is not fired during a period in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, and it is easy to avoid a situation in which a player who has properly played a game suffers a disadvantage. be able to.

  Further, a right strike detection switch 603 for detecting an abnormal firing state is provided in a part of the game area and upstream of the distribution mechanism 601 and the upper prize winning device 434. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately detect a situation in which the game ball does not flow down to the distribution mechanism 601 side, and to appropriately execute control corresponding to the abnormal launch state when an abnormal launch state occurs.

  In addition, when an abnormal firing state occurs in the round immediately before the specific round, even if the game ball does not flow down the right-side flow-down route KR, the operation of the upper-entry control solenoid 464 is canceled to win the top prize. The game ball is prevented from entering the mouth 434A. For this reason, it is possible to temporarily stop the appearance of an advantageous state for the player, and to cause a misunderstanding that the advantageous state in which the prize-winning condition is easy to be established is longer than other players. Without a situation, a situation where a player who has properly played a game suffers a disadvantage can be easily avoided.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the player's firing operation, the right hit detection switch 603 determines that the game ball is in the abnormal firing state due to the non-period of the game ball in the game area for a certain period of time. In such a case, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the shooting operation is stopped and disadvantageous.

  Next, a description will be given of an illegal entry suppression function for preventing a game ball from unduly entering the specific passage TA in the special game state of the 16R big hit (V non-winning). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a ball transfer device 602 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution mechanism 601 capable of generating a state in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA. When a power failure occurs, the ball transport device 602 retains the game ball flowing down the transport path KT as a flow-down path leading to the specific path TA in the transport path KT as a predetermined range. In the special game state of the 16R big hit (V non-winning), an unreasonable entry suppressing function for suppressing entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA is exhibited.

  Specifically, when the main control board 920 is temporarily in a blackout state during the short interval of the 16R big hit (V non-winning), the game ball flowing down the transport path KT moves to the specific path TA. Without approaching, stagnate on the spot. If the transport path KT is a path that is inclined downward so as to approach the specific path TA due to the weight of the game balls, the game balls will approach the specific path TA during the power outage, and after the power is restored, a short time will occur. In spite of passing through the interval, a situation may occur in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in order for the game ball to go to the specific path TA via the transfer path KT, it is necessary to energize the ball transfer device 602. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game ball unreasonably enters the specific passage TA due to a power failure during the special game state of the 16R big hit (V non-winning).

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment different from the above-described embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as a first embodiment) will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the upper round winning device 434, the sorting mechanism 601 and the ball transporting device 602 are used to execute a specific round in which an accessible state in which the vehicle can enter the specific passage TA occurs. Special game state including was realized. In the second embodiment, the ball transporting device 602 is not provided, and the game ball can enter the specific passage TA by a mechanism that allows the game ball to flow down by its own weight between the upper winning device 434 and the distribution mechanism 601. A specific round occurs.

  FIG. 39 is a view illustrating a game board 1400 according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 39, for ease of understanding, the lower entry restriction mechanism 1453 in the entry allowable posture and the distribution mechanism 1601 in the guidance posture are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines. In the following description of the second embodiment, only different parts from the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described.

  Two large winning devices 1433 and 1434 are provided on the right-side flow-down route KR on the right side of the front surface of the gaming board 1400 so as to be separated from the upstream side and the downstream side. An upper-level winning device 1434 having the same configuration as the upper-level winning device 434 according to the above-described embodiment is provided on the upper front portion of the gaming board 1400. And the lower large prize winning device 1433 in which the specific passage TA is set is provided. The upper and lower big winning devices 1433 and 1434 are provided with upper and lower entry restriction mechanisms 1453 and 1454, respectively, which take an entry-prohibited position and an entry-permitted position so that game balls flowing down the game area can be entered. Is controlled by main controller 370 (main control board 920). As a result, the game balls can be made to enter the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A as the entrances of the respective winning devices 1433 and 1434.

  An allocation mechanism 1601 having the same configuration as the allocation mechanism 601 according to the above-described embodiment is provided inside the lower-level winning device 1433 (lower-level winning opening 1433A). In addition, a starting device 1436 and a right starting winning device 1432 are provided at an upstream portion and a downstream portion along the right flow path KR where the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A are arranged. The starting device 1436 has the same configuration as the starting device 436 according to the above embodiment, and the right starting winning device 1432 is configured to operate so that a game ball can enter the rear side of the game area. It is different from the right starting winning device 432 according to the embodiment.

  The connection passage KD corresponding to the passage between the upper and lower winning openings 1433A and 1434A provided in the upper and lower big winning devices 1433 and 1434 is configured such that a game ball passing through the front side of the upper winning opening 1434A is inserted into the lower winning opening 1433A. It is configured such that a certain period of time or more (in this modified example, the shortest flow down time set to 3.0 seconds) elapses before the arrival. The connection passage KD is provided with a flow delay unit 1435 that delays the flow of the game ball. The downflow delay section 1435 is formed by bending left and right, and the bottom surface of the flow path of the game ball is formed at a gentle downward slope (for example, 10 degrees or less).

  At the lower left side of the upper winning award device 1434, an outlet 1438 through which game balls can enter is provided. The discharge port 1438 is an inlet portion of a collection / discharge passage through which game balls that have entered the game area are discharged to the outside without winning. The game ball that has deviated to the left in front view at the peripheral portion of the upper winning award device 1434 and above it enters the outlet 1438. For this reason, in the situation where the game is played by the right-handed game technique, the probability that the game ball will enter the upper winning prize opening 1434A, which can be entered, is not set to 100%, and the lower prize winning opening 1433A is won through the flow delay unit 1435. The probability is not set to 100%. In this setting, when the right-handed game technique is used, a game ball enters (wins) with a probability of approximately 99% or more in a situation where the game ball can enter the upper-level winning opening 1434A with a probability of approximately 99% or more. Further, in a situation where the game ball cannot enter the upper winning prize opening 1434A, the game ball flows down the flow delay section 1435 with a probability of about 99% or more, and in a situation where the game ball can enter the lower prize winning opening 1433A. It is preferable that the game balls enter (win) the lower winning award 1433A with a probability of 99% or more.

  In a situation where the upper and lower big winning devices 1433 and 1434 are in an entry-prohibited position (vertical entry prohibited state), the upper and lower winning ports 1433A and 1434A are closed so as not to enter. In the vertical entry prohibition state, as shown in FIG. 39 (A), the game ball fired on the right side of the game area passes through the front side of the upper winning prize port 1434A and flows downstream. Then, the game ball moves downward while moving left and right through the flow delay section 1435, and flows down the downstream side through the entrance portion of the lower large winning opening 1433A.

  In a situation where the upper prize winning device 1434 is in the entry allowable posture (upper entry permitted state), as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the opening / closing plate part forming the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is tilted forward from the upright posture. Project into the game area. As a result, the game ball enters the upper winning prize opening 1434A opened on the rear side of the game area and the flow of the game sphere to the downstream side is prevented, and the game sphere advances to the side where the lower winning prize opening 1433A is provided. It will be in a state where it does not flow (flow down state). When the inflowable state continues for a certain period of time or longer, no game ball is present in the connection passage KD corresponding to the portion between the upper and lower winning ports 1433A and 1434A.

  When the upper-prize winning device 1434 shifts to the entry-prohibited position after the upper-side entry permissible state has continued for a certain period of time, the game ball starts passing down the front side of the upper-prize winning opening 1434A to the downstream side. After the upper prize winning device 1434 shifts to the entry-prohibited position and after the shortest falling time has elapsed, the game ball reaches the lower prize winning opening 1433A. For this reason, even before the upper entry permissible state ends, before the shortest falling time elapses, even if the lower large winning device 1433 takes the entry allowable posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower large winning opening 1433A, and the shortest After the elapse of the flowing time, the game ball can enter the lower big prize winning device 1433.

  In a situation where the lower-large-prize winning device 1433 has taken the entry-permitted posture (lower-side entry permitted state), as shown in FIG. 39 (C), the opening / closing plate part of the lower entry restriction mechanism 1453 changes from the posture protruding forward. It is immersed in the rear side and stored behind the game area. As a result, the game ball can enter the lower winning opening 1433A that opens upward.

  The upper and lower big prize winning devices 1433 and 1434 and the distribution mechanism 1601 according to the present modified example are the same as the control for the upper and lower big prize winning devices 433 and 434 and the distribution mechanism 601 according to the above-described embodiment. 920. Thus, a special game state in which a game ball can enter the specific path TA in the specific round (sixth round) is different from the special game state in the interval time immediately before the specific round, and the game ball is moved to the specific path TA. And a special game state in which entry is impossible.

  In addition, at a plurality of locations on the right-side flow-down path KR and inside the lower-level winning device 1433 (lower-level winning opening 1433A), movable movable intermittently protruding into the path from the back side of the path to prevent the flow of the game ball. Protruding pieces S1 to S5 are provided. The movable protruding pieces S1 to S5 operate under the control of the main control board 920, and are operable by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown) that goes out of the path in an ON state. The movable protruding pieces S1 to S5 operate at a cycle equal to or less than the firing time interval of the game balls (for example, 0.55 seconds), and have a ball interval generation function of causing the game balls to flow down one ball at a time on the downstream side. Have. This causes the game balls to interfere with each other while the game balls are flowing down due to their own weight in the flow-down delay unit 1435, making it impossible for the game balls to flow to the downstream side, or causing the flow delay unit 1435 to move the game balls extremely slowly. Can be reduced, and the game ball can flow down to the specific passage TA at an appropriate timing. During the power failure, the movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 retreat from the flow path of the game balls, and the game balls flow down to the downstream side.

  Here, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, in the special game state of the 16R big hit (V non-winning), the illegal entry suppression function for preventing the game ball from unduly entering the specific passage TA, and the 16R big hit (V A power failure invalidation avoidance function is provided to avoid a situation in which a game ball that would have entered the specific passage TA if a power failure did not occur in the special gaming state of (prize) is invalidated due to a power failure immediately before the start of the specific round. ing.

  The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is provided with a power failure monitoring process S9202 for continuously executing a part of the process even during the occurrence of a power failure state. The power failure monitoring process S9202 of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment has a configuration in which some processes are added to the power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) according to the first embodiment. The power failure monitoring process S9202 corresponds to the illegal entry suppression function and the power failure invalidation avoidance function in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power failure monitoring process S9202 according to the second embodiment. In the power failure monitoring process S9202, first, it is determined whether or not the power failure preparation flag is ON (S9001). If the power failure preparation flag is not ON, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal is output (S9002). The power failure preparation flag is a flag that is turned on when it is confirmed that the power failure signal is continuously output from the power supply monitoring unit 911 to the main control board 920 in three confirmations. It is constituted by a part of. When the power failure preparation flag is turned on, some boards are in a state of waiting for power-off after performing some processing such as completing the payout of game balls being paid out as processing corresponding to the occurrence of power failure, and To reduce the power consumed.

  In the process of S9002, when it is determined that the power failure signal is being output (S9002: Y), the power failure signal is being transmitted to the main control board 920. In this case, the value of the power failure signal counter is updated (for example, “1” is added and updated) (S9003), and it is determined whether the updated value has reached “3” (S9004). The power failure signal counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmations of the output of the power failure signal, and is constituted by a part of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  In the process of S9004, when it is determined that the value of the power failure signal counter is “3” or more (S9004: Y), the process proceeds to S9007 and subsequent processes corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure. On the other hand, in the process of S9004, if it is determined that the value of the power failure signal counter has not reached “3” (S9004: N), the power failure monitoring process S9202 ends.

  In the process of S9002, when it is determined that the power failure signal is not being output (S9002: N), the power is normally supplied, and in this case, the value of the power failure signal counter is “0”. Is determined (S9005), if not “0” (S9005: N), the power failure signal counter is set to “0” and reset (S9006), and the power failure monitoring process S9202 ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9005, when it is determined that the value of the power failure signal counter is “0” (S9005: Y), the process of S9006 is skipped, and the power failure monitoring process S9202 ends.

  By the processes of S9002 to S9006, when the power failure signal has been turned on three times in succession, it is determined that a power failure state has occurred, the power failure preparation flag is turned on, and each process corresponding to the power failure state can be executed. ing.

  In the process of S9004, when the value of the power failure signal counter is determined to be “3” or more (S9004: Y), “0” is set in the power failure signal counter (S9007), and the payout control board 930 A power-off command is transmitted to the control board 940 (S9008). The payout control board 930 and the sub-control board 940 that have received the power-off command execute only the minimum necessary processing during execution and prepare for power-off promptly. The control stops the control of electric components and elements that require power.

  After the processing in S9008, the power failure preparation flag is turned on (S9009), and it is determined whether or not the specific round pre-flag is set (S9010). If the flag before the specific round is set (S9010: Y), the power outage monitoring process S9202 ends, and the main control board 920 continues the process before the power outage occurs.

  In the process of S9010, when it is determined that the flag before the specific round is not set (S9010: N), it is determined whether or not the immediately preceding interval is in progress (S9011). : Y), the power outage monitoring process S9202 ends. In the process of S9011, when it is determined that it is not during the immediately preceding interval (S9011: N), it is determined whether or not the switching solenoid 465 is operating (S9012). S9012: Y), the power outage monitoring process S9202 ends.

  By the processing of S9010 to S9012, before the end of the round immediately before the specific round, the specific round is started, the switching solenoid 465 is operated, and until the end of the possible entry period in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA, the main The control board 920 can continuously execute each process related to the progress of the special game state without preparing for a power outage. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs immediately before the specific round, the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA in the special game state of the 16R big hit (V non-winning), and the special game state of the 16R big hit (V winning). In, the game ball can enter the specific passage TA.

  In the process of S9012, if it is determined that the switching solenoid 465 is not operating (S9012), the power failure preparation flag is turned off (S9013), and a power-off command is transmitted to the power / fire control board 900 to power / fire. The control board 900 prepares for a process corresponding to a power failure (S9014), calculates and stores a RAM determination value (S9015), prohibits access to the RAM (S9016), and enters an infinite loop.

  In the process of S9001, if the power failure preparation flag is determined to be on (S9001: Y), the process proceeds to S9010 (S9001: Y). Thus, the main control board 920 does not prepare for a power outage, limited to a period from before the end of the immediately preceding round of the specific round to the end of the accessible period in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA in the specific round. Thus, each process relating to the progress of the special game state can be continuously executed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, the power failure monitoring process S9202 detects a predetermined power failure state in which three power failure signals are continuously confirmed, and the game ball is transferred to the specific passage TA. The control that advances the special game state is executed in a period including an accessible period in which the switching solenoid 465 operates so that the vehicle can enter. For this reason, even in the situation where the power outage state occurs, the control to advance the special game state is executed for a certain period including the accessible period. Therefore, a game ball that should have entered the specific passage TA has stopped entering the specific passage TA due to the occurrence of a power failure, and a player who was playing a game properly suffers a disadvantage, or a criminal intentionally changes the power failure state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a fraudulent act of causing the game ball to enter the specific passage TA unfairly is performed.

  Further, when a predetermined power failure state occurs, a power-off command is transmitted to the sub control board 940 before the power failure preparation flag is turned on, and the decoration symbol display device 479 by the sub control board 940 is transmitted. The control is stopped prior to a part of the control including the operation control of the distribution mechanism 601 and the upper winning device 434 by the main control board 920. For this reason, the power consumption by the display control of the decorative symbol display device 479 can be suppressed, and the power can be distributed to a part of the control including the control of the distribution mechanism 601 and the upper winning device 434. Therefore, the progress of the game in the special game state relating to the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA can be easily continued by using limited electric power.

  Further, in the case where the switching solenoid 465 is turned on in a specific round and control is performed to generate the state in which the distribution mechanism 601 can enter, even if a predetermined power failure state occurs, the state before the state in which entry is possible is started. During the period from when the switching solenoid 465 is turned off to when the entry-possible state is completed, the power failure preparation flag is maintained in the on state by the processes of S9010 to S9012, and the special symbol-related control timer corresponding to the progress of the special game state. Is continuously updated by the timer update process S1210 (see FIG. 36). Since the special game state is advanced by the update of the special symbol related control timer, it is possible to suppress the influence of the occurrence of the power failure with respect to the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA, and preferably avoid the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of the power failure. Can be easily avoided.

  Note that the power failure monitoring process S9202 does not necessarily require each process of the main control board 920 to proceed in the same manner as before the power failure monitoring, and by executing at least a process related to updating the special symbol related control timer, a 16R jackpot (V In the special game state (non-winning), it is preferable because it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the specific passage TA.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine according to the third embodiment is provided with a lower winning prize device 2433 having an unfair entry suppressing function for suppressing entry of a game ball into the specific passage TA in a special game state of a 16R big hit (V non-winning). I have. The lower prize winning device 2433 has a different mechanism from the lower prize winning devices 433 and 1433 according to the first and second embodiments, and only one game ball enters the specific passage TA by the distribution mechanism 601. Does not result in a V prize, and when a plurality of game spheres enter the specific passage TA, the game sphere advances to the V region side as a specific region to generate a V prize.

  FIGS. 41 (A) to 41 (D) are explanatory diagrams of a lower winning device 2433 of a pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 41 (B) to FIG. 41 (D), for easy understanding, the direction in which the game ball flows is illustrated by an arrow, and the game ball is also shown together, and the downward entry control is set to the entry allowable posture. The mechanism 453, the distributing mechanism 601 in the guiding posture, and the closing operation mechanism 2001 that has exited the path of the game ball are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, a lower entry winning mechanism 2433 is provided with a lower entry restriction mechanism 453 at an entrance portion of a lower entrance winning opening 433A, and a distribution mechanism 601 is provided inside the lower entrance winning opening 433A. Have been. On the lower side of the distribution mechanism 601 corresponding to the inside of the distribution mechanism 601, the downstream side of the specific passage TA branches in a plurality of directions, and one side on which the game ball does not flow down preferentially (the right side of FIG. 41A). The specific path TA is configured to be continuous with (lower side). In a region that is continuous to the lower right side in the specific passage TA, a V region (a region with the letter “V” in FIG. 41A) is provided as a specific region, and is bent continuously from the left to the left. The passage is continuous with the non-specific passage TA (the side of the area marked with “N” in FIG. 41A). A specific path switch (not shown) is provided on the downstream side branched to the V region side, and when a game ball reaches the V region, a V prize is generated.

  Inside the distribution mechanism 601, a closing operation mechanism 2001 that can close the non-specific passage TA from the specific passage TA is provided. The closing operation mechanism 2001 operates in synchronization with the distribution mechanism 601 under the control of the main control board 920. The closing operation mechanism 2001 opens the passage leading to the non-specific region when the switching solenoid 465 is turned on and the distribution mechanism 601 is in the guiding posture, that is, when the game ball can enter the specific passage TA. Exit backward. On the other hand, in a situation where the distribution mechanism 601 is in the non-guidance posture and the game ball can enter the specific path TA, the closing operation mechanism 2001 closes the path leading from the specific path TA to the non-specific area.

  Inside the distribution mechanism 601, only one game ball is upstream of the closing operation mechanism 2001 (right side in FIG. 41) in a situation where the closing operation mechanism 2001 closes the passage leading from the specific path TA to the non-specific area. Is provided with a hold area 2002 that can be held. The reserve area 2002 is provided below the distribution mechanism 601 so that the game ball enters the distribution area 601 with a higher priority than the V-area when the distribution mechanism 601 takes the guiding posture and the game ball enters the interior of the distribution mechanism 601. Located on the side.

  On the right side where the V region is located with respect to the reservation region 2002, there is provided a retaining plate 2003 projecting upward to partition the reservation region 2002 and the V region corresponding to the downstream side of the specific passage TA. A game ball that has once entered the holding area 2002 is restricted from moving to the right by the holding plate portion 2003, and is set to a height (for example, a height up to a position close to the center of the game ball) that cannot advance to the V area. ing.

  In a possible entry period in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the specific path TA, as shown in FIG. 41B, the game ball that first enters the specific path TA enters the reservation area 2002. . When a subsequent game ball enters the specific path TA in a situation where the game ball is held in the holding area 2002, as shown in FIG. 41C, the game ball collides with the game ball (holding ball) held in the holding area 2002. Then, the game ball is guided to the V region side by the reserved ball.

  When the switching solenoid 465 is turned off after the elapse of the allowable entry period, as shown in FIG. 41D, the entrance to the specific passage TA is closed by the distribution mechanism 601. Thereby, the game ball that subsequently enters the lower winning award 433A is guided to the non-specific passage TA. Further, when the switching solenoid 465 is turned off, the closing operation mechanism 2001 retreats rearward, and the reserved ball retained in the retaining area 2002 is guided to the non-specific passage TA.

  Here, the number of game balls guided to the specific path TA side in the specific round by the operation of the distribution mechanism 601 needs to be set to at least two or more balls because one ball is consumed by the reserved balls. It is preferable that the setting is such that a plurality of game balls are guided to the specific passage TA side. The number of game balls guided to the specific passage TA can be adjusted by the length of time that the switching solenoid 465 is on in the specific round. Further, the number of reserved balls for guiding game balls to the specific passage TA may be set to two or more other numbers. For example, the reserved area 2002 is set to a depth at which two game balls are reserved. May be set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, the specific path TA provided with the V region is played only when a plurality of game balls are guided toward the specific path TA by the distribution mechanism 601 in the specific round. The ball may be able to travel. For this reason, in the special game state of the 16R big hit (V non-winning), the game is caught by the upper entry control mechanism 454 in the fifth round in the fifth round, and the game ball is moved downward before the end of the fifth round. Even if a situation where a game ball enters the specific passage TA side due to an accidental event such as flowing down occurs, it is possible to prevent the game ball from reaching the V region. Therefore, in the special game state of the 16R jackpot (V non-winning), the probability that the game ball enters the V region can be made close to zero, and the maker side unfairly sets the profit set so that the player cannot be obtained. It is possible to avoid the situation where it is obtained.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the embodiment.

  (1) In the above-described pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the lottery reach generation unit game is allocated to the unit game after the confirmed reach generation unit game has been described, but the unit game before the confirmed reach generation unit game is described. Can be assigned a lottery reach generation unit game.

  In the above-described pachinko machine 100, a configuration in which a fixed reach generation unit game is assigned to one unit game and a lottery reach generation unit game is assigned to one unit game is assigned to each transition pattern. As described above, a configuration in which a fixed reach generating unit game or a lottery reach generating unit game is assigned to a plurality of unit games can be adopted. In the case of this configuration, if a reach display of a number of times exceeding the total number of unit games assigned to the fixed reach generating unit game and the number of unit games assigned to the lottery reach generating unit game occurs, It will be a big hit. In addition, when the confirmed reach generating unit game is assigned to one or more unit games, and the lottery reach generating unit game is assigned to one or more unit games, the order of the unit games is appropriately changed. be able to.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, in each transition pattern, the number of unit games to which the fixed reach generating unit game is assigned is the same as the number of unit games to which the lottery reach generating unit game is assigned. Although the case has been described, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of times of assignment is different.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, a configuration including both the unit game allocated to the fixed reach generation unit game and the unit game allocated to the lottery reach generation unit game has been described, but only one of them is included. It can also be configured.

  Also, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the appearance mode of the reach display of the decorative symbol is controlled based on the transition pattern has been described. However, another predetermined display related to the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, one of the decorative symbols, It is also possible to control the stop mode when stopping the unit, the character that appears due to the change of the decorative pattern, and the mode of generation of the effect that occurs with the change of the decorative pattern.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the appearance mode of the reach display of the decorative symbol is controlled based on the transition pattern has been described. However, the configuration in which the variation aspect of the variation time longer than the predetermined time is controlled. You can also.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, the configuration has been described in which the generation mode of the reach display in the probable change gaming state in which the maximum number of continuous unit games is determined is controlled based on the transition pattern. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the appearance mode of the reach display in the certain probable game state is controlled based on the transition pattern.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the appearance mode of the reach display in the probable change game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is controlled based on the transition pattern has been described. The mode can be controlled based on the transition pattern.

  (2) In the pachinko machine 100 described above, in the conversion value replacement determination, two separated ranges are added to the conversion value by adding the same number of values to the conversion value as the number of values included in the maximum value range. The case where the conversion values are integrated into the continuous minimum value range and whether to replace the conversion value is collectively determined has been described, but the same number of values as the number of values included in the minimum value range is converted value. , The two separated ranges can be integrated into one continuous maximum value range, and whether to replace the converted value can be determined collectively.

  In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the case where the set of values not adopted as the stop symbol identification value is a continuous value range including the minimum value and a continuous value range including the maximum value has been described. A set of values that are not adopted as symbol identification values may be values in a range that does not include the minimum value or the maximum value. Furthermore, the case where the set of values not adopted as stop symbol identification values is dispersed in two separated ranges has been described. However, the case where the set of values not adopted as stop symbol identification values is one continuous range, or three It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the components are dispersed in the above-mentioned separated range.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, a case has been described where the operation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is a combination of the zero padding left bit shift operation and the exclusive OR operation. It can be a combination of operations. The basic logical operations include a bit inversion operation, a zero padding left bit shift operation, a one padding left bit shift operation, a zero padding right bit shift operation, a one padding right bit shift operation, a left bit rotation operation, a right bit rotation operation, and a logical sum. Operation, AND operation, and exclusive OR operation. Further, in the above description, a case has been described in which the operation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is a combination of only the basic logical operations. However, it is assumed that the operation includes an operation different from the basic logical operations such as the four arithmetic operations. Can also.

  In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the case has been described where the calculation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is performed before the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It can be configured to be performed during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Further, a configuration may be made in which the variable display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. In addition, when the operation used to generate the converted value of the symbol identification value is much more complicated than the operation according to the present embodiment or includes an operation other than the logical operation, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. If you are concerned about the delay of the start of the game or the delay of the transition from the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to the stop symbol display, perform it during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is preferred.

  Also, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, a configuration has been described in which after converting the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter into a symbol identification value, a converted value is generated by a predetermined calculation based on the symbol identification value. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value that can be taken by the big hit symbol random number counter is limited to “250” or less, and a converted value is generated by a predetermined calculation based on the value obtained from the big hit symbol random number counter.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, the case where the range in which the symbol identification value and the stop symbol identification value can be taken is expressed by the same number of bits as the number of basic operation bits in the main control board 920 has been described. A configuration expressed by a number can also be used.

  Also, in the above description, a case has been described in which the pattern of the transition that causes deterministic or selective losing reach in the probable game state is not easily guessed by the player, and the playability in the probable game state is improved. However, the number of continuation rounds in the special game state is not easily inferred, and the configuration of improving the playability in the special game state and the number of unit games to be continued in the specific game state (probable change game state or time-saving game state) The present invention can be applied to a configuration that improves the playability in a specific game state without being easily guessed.

  (3) In the above-described pachinko machine 100, a unit game is executed with a start condition established by a start winning in one of the upper middle starting winning device 431A, the lower middle starting winning device 431B and the right starting winning device 432. However, the starting condition for generating the unit game right is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may be another configuration. For example, the number of devices that satisfy the starting condition may be different, the satisfaction of the starting condition may be based on the passage of a ball-entering portion as a starting device, or the ball-in portion provided inside the winning device may be used as a condition. The start condition may be satisfied when a game ball is entered.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, as a specific game start condition for starting a specific game state corresponding to a probable game state according to each transition pattern is established, a jackpot winning in a unit game based on a start winning, and The case where three conditions of the determination of the stop symbol identification value corresponding to the transition pattern and the entry of the game ball into the specific passage TA (V winning) in the special game state executed by the jackpot win have been described, The establishment of the specific game start condition is not limited to the above condition, but may be other conditions such as omitting the V prize and shifting to the surely changing game state at the time of the jackpot winning determination by the value of the jackpot symbol random number counter. . In addition, the determination of the stop symbol identification value as the specific game start condition is based on the value of a counter different from the winning random number counter used for the big hit winning, but the value of the winning random number counter corresponds to the type of transition pattern. May be set, and the stop symbol identification value may be determined according to the value of the winning random number counter.

  Also, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, the stop symbol identification value corresponding to the probable game state according to each transition pattern is displayed by the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol. Alternatively, in addition to or in addition to this, the decorative symbol display device 479 may display information corresponding to the stop symbol identification value. For example, during the special game state, the decorative symbol display device 479 may display the number of times of the probability change states B and C by the establishment of a predetermined display condition, and the number of remaining unit games is 50 or more as the number of times of the probability change state C. If a transition pattern corresponding to a large probability change game state of a privilege such as is selected, information in characters such as “chance has arrived” may be displayed during the special game state, or the number of times the probability change state D is started may be set to “ It may be displayed by information including a number indicating the number of times the privilege is given, such as "50 or more times", or the specific number of remaining unit games at which the probability change state D is started may be displayed as it is.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, among the probable change states A to E, only the probable change states D and E generate the probable change game state in which the small hit probability is set to the high probability and the privilege is given to the player. The method of making the content of the privilege given to the player different is not limited to the above method, and the gaming state in which the small hit probability is high is continued for a certain period from the start of the probable changing gaming state, and the number of continuations is determined. The content of the privilege given to the player may be made different according to the stop symbol identification value. Further, it is not always necessary to change the number of times that the small hit probability as the content of the privilege to be granted becomes a high probability. If the lengths of the probability change states D and E are constant (for example, 10 times) and only the start time is different, You may let it. Even in this case, it is possible to make a difference in the benefits obtained depending on whether or not the game state shifts due to the jackpot winning, and the game can be diversified.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, the length of the period of the probable change game state is a fixed number of times in which a unit game is executed 100 times unless a big hit is won, but the number of times may be changed. In this case, the variable display of the unit game by the first special symbol by the left-handed gaming technique and the variable display of the unit game by the second special symbol by the right-handed gaming technique are simultaneously executed in parallel, and one of the variable displays is won. In this case, the other variable display is stopped, and a very long fluctuation time (for example, one hour) longer than the long fluctuation time 2 is selected as the unit game of the long fluctuation time 1 in the probable fluctuation state C during the probable fluctuation game state. As a setting, a bonus is given (for example, the small hitting probability is set to a high probability) from a unit game (for example, a unit game in the probable change state B) before the super long fluctuation time is selected. Is also good. In this case, since the execution time of the probable change state C is changed by controlling the transition pattern, the size of the privilege to be given can be changed according to the transition pattern, and the transition pattern is a common pattern. However, if the very long change time is selected in the probable change state C, the game cannot be continued by the right-handed technique after that, so that the award of the privilege by the small hit continuous winning can be terminated halfway with a preset probability. it can. In other words, it is possible to set the end time of the gaming state in which the bonus with the small hit probability having a high probability is given a predetermined number of times by controlling the fluctuation time by the transition pattern.

  Here, it is not always necessary to set the super long fluctuation time to a fluctuation time over one hour or more, and it is sufficient that the very long fluctuation time is set to a time sufficiently longer than the maximum fluctuation time that can be set in the normal game state. It is preferable that the time is set to approximately twice or more the time, and it is preferable that the time is set to approximately three times or more.

  Further, as a plurality of transition patterns, another game state in which the number of starts of the probable change state D is the same and the super long fluctuation time is set in the middle of the probable change state D is changed at a different timing from the start of the probable change state D. In this case, even if the number of unit games to which the privilege is given to the player in the probable change state D is set to the same number, the content of the privilege to be given to the player is not changed. It can be substantially different.

  Further, as at least one of the transition patterns, in the unit game in the probable change state D, the super long fluctuation time may be selected with a lower probability (for example, 1/1000) than the big hit winning. In this case, Since the number of consecutive small hits can be made different even in the same transition pattern, it is possible to further increase the modes in which the privilege is given, and realize various game characteristics.

  In the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100, when there is a jackpot win in the middle of the probability change game state, and when the probability change game state in a transition pattern in which the number of times of start of the probability change state D is slow is selected, no jackpot win is performed. The configuration in which a gaming state with a transition pattern in which less bonuses are granted can be selected has been described. However, when a jackpot is won during the probable change gaming state, a bonus that is more reliably given than when there is no big hit is It is good also as a structure which becomes large. For example, the maximum value of the number of obtained balls in the probability change state D may be set to be smaller than the minimum value of the number of obtained balls obtained by the jackpot winning. As the minimum value of the number of balls obtained by the jackpot winning, the number of balls obtained in the special game state, the number of balls obtained in the probability change game state by the transition pattern in which the number of unit games in the probability change state D is set to the minimum number Is obtained as an example.

  Also, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, an example has been described in which a bonus is provided to a player in a probable change game state after a special game state. The privilege may be provided only during the state. In addition, it is not always necessary to set the gaming state in which the bonus is given to the player by the small hits win to the probable change game state, and the normal game state and the big hits win probability are the same, and the small hits win probability is a game state in which a high period is set. May be generated corresponding to the stop symbol identification value. Also, with regard to the time saving state, it is not always necessary to add the time saving state in the probable changing game state, and a winning device without a mechanism for changing the entry probability may be provided as the right starting winning device 432, and the unit game holding function may be provided. For example, the unit game of the second special symbol may not be held, and the right to the next unit game may be established only when a winning start occurs after the unit game being executed is completed. good.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, the small hit probability is set to a high probability for a part of the game state (probable state D, E) of the probable game state controlled by the transition pattern, and the privilege is given to the player. Although the privilege-giving game state is generated, the privilege-giving game state is not limited to the winning probability, and may be realized by changing the setting of the fluctuation time by controlling the transition pattern in accordance with the number of times the unit game is executed. Alternatively, a small hit privilege, such as the length of a possible ball entry period during which a game ball can enter the lower big prize winning device 433 or the number of winning prizes before shifting to the entry-prohibited position when the small hit is won, may be changed. Even if the unit game wins a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol is long, the number of game balls passing near the lower big prize winning device 433 during the fluctuation display of the special symbol increases accordingly. As the time is longer, the number of shot balls not winning is increased and the number of obtained balls as a privilege can be reduced. In addition, as the fluctuation time in the privilege-giving game state, unless the game balls are continuously fired from the start of the fluctuation display, the number of the obtained balls decreases because the game balls are not in time for the transition to the entry allowable posture of the lower big prize device 433. It is preferable that the unit game is set, and it is preferable that the fluctuation time is set shorter than the average time from when the game ball is fired to when the game ball reaches the lower big prize winning device 433. Thereby, in the privilege-giving game state, only the period in which the unit winning period of the lower big prize winning device 433 is long plural times by the small hitting winning and the length of the variable time is varied by continuously generating a plurality of unit games, The bonus can be efficiently provided to the player at a predetermined timing during the certainty-variable game state.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the small hit is set as the lottery result of the unit game according to the second special symbol has been described, but the small hit is also set as the lottery result of the unit game according to the first special symbol. May be set, and the small win may be controlled by the same lottery condition. However, it is necessary to clarify the playability to which the privilege is given by the right-handed game method, and to use the right-handed game method for the small hit bonus when the small hit is won in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is preferably larger than the left-handed game technique, for example, the fluctuating time at the time of winning a small hit in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or entry into the entrance of the lower large winning device 433. The permissible time may be different, and the unit permissible for the second special symbol may be set longer for one winning, and the unit pertaining to the second special symbol may be set once. The change time of the special symbol may be set to be short.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, the fluctuation time of the probable change state D is set to the same time as a part of the fluctuation time of the probable change state A or the probable change state C. It is also possible to set the fluctuation time to be shorter than the fluctuation time, so that it is easy for the player to easily understand that the gaming state in which the privilege is given by the continuous winning of small hits in the certain-variable gaming state is different from other gaming states. Can be shown.

  In the above-described pachinko machine 100, an example has been described in which both the fluctuation time and the small hit condition are changed in accordance with the transition pattern as the game state in the certain change game state after the special game state. Only one of the time or the small hit winning probability may be changed. For example, even if the selection condition of the fluctuation time during the probability change game state is set to be constant, the small hit probability and the small hit bonus of the unit game in the probability change game state are changed in accordance with the stop symbol identification value in accordance with the transition pattern. In this case, it is possible to provide the player with different game contents in which the contents of the privilege given to the player in the probable game state are different. In addition, even if the small hit condition in the probable change game state is set to be constant, if the fluctuation time in the probable change game state is changed according to the transition pattern in accordance with the stop symbol identification value, It is possible to provide the player with a gaming property in which the content of providing the formal privilege is changed by executing the preceding effect.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, a configuration has been described in which a plurality of types of pre-confirmation pre-productions and post-confirmation pre-productions are executed as pre-productions. May be performed, or none of them may be performed. In addition, only a part of the above-described plurality of types of preceding effects may be performed as the preceding effect.

  (4) In the above-described pachinko machine 100, the upper winning award device 434, the lower winning award device 433, and the distribution mechanism 601 allow a certain approach in a round in which the moving direction of the game ball is changed. After taking the posture or the guidance posture, it is assumed that the posture returns to the original posture when the operation end condition is satisfied.However, it is not always necessary to operate in a motion pattern in which a fixed posture is taken in each round, and it is not necessary to operate in a motion pattern in each round. At least in part, intermittently, or straddling a plurality of times, it operates in an operation pattern that takes an approach allowable posture or a guiding posture, and maintains the original posture before the start of the operation due to establishment of the operation end condition. Cases may be included.

  For example, in the round immediately before the specific round (the fifth round in the above-described embodiment), the operation of the upper prize winning device 434 that has made it impossible for the game ball to flow down to the specific path TA side is intermittently taken into an allowable position, and The system is configured to temporarily take the entry prohibited position in the period of the period or irregularly, and the game ball flows down in front of the upper winning award 434A at a fixed ratio (for example, 1 ball out of 30 balls) and is specified. A special game state that progresses to the side of the passage TA may be generated. In this case, in the fifth round, it is possible to generate a difficult-to-flow period in which the game balls flow down to the specific passage TA side with a certain probability, but it is difficult to flow down to the specific passage TA side, instead of the flow-down impossible period. The game ball enters the specific passage TA with a small probability (for example, approximately 15%) even in the specific round of the special game state of “16R jackpot (V non-winning)” via a short interval, and a V prize can be generated. Playability can be added.

  In addition, in the specific round (the sixth round in the above-described embodiment), the operation of the distribution mechanism 601 that allows the game ball to flow down to the specific path TA is intermittently set to a guiding posture, and is performed at a constant cycle or irregularly. A special game state in which a non-guidance posture is temporarily set and a game ball progresses to the non-specific passage TB side instead of the specific passage TA at a fixed ratio (for example, one ball per 10 balls) is generated. You may make it do. In this case, it is possible to add a playability in which the game ball does not accidentally enter the specific path TA in the possible entry period in the sixth round of the special game state of “16R big hit (V winning)”, and the entry possible period At 100%, the game ball does not enter the specific passage TA, and the game ball enters the specific passage TA with a high probability (for example, approximately 95%), so that a game property capable of generating a V prize can be added.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, 100% or 0% of the special game state (specifically, “16R big hit (V winning)” and “16R big hit (V no winning)” is selected. Although the case where the game ball enters the specific passage TA with the probability has been described, a special game in which the game ball enters the specific passage TA with another probability in place of or in addition to at least one of the probabilities is described. For example, a special game state in which a period during which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA is set to be substantially the same as the firing time interval of the game ball is generated, and a probability of approximately 70% is generated. It is also possible to include a special game state in which the game ball enters the specific path TA with the length of the interval time immediately before the specific round and the play from the lower big prize winning device 433 in the specific round to the specific path TA. Balls can be set special game state to enter gaming ball to a particular passage TA in various probability by varying the ratio of the length of the entrance permitted forming period forming a ready ingress.

  Further, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, a configuration has been described in which, when entering the specific passage TA by the distribution mechanism 601, a V prize is always achieved with a probability of 100%. With a certain probability (for example, 1/3), the player enters the specific area in the specific path TA and a V prize is generated, and a gaming state advantageous to the player only when the V prize occurs (for example, , A probability change game state) may be generated.

  In the above-described pachinko machine 100, a game ball enters the specific passage TA in a special game state having a long interval time as a standby time immediately before a specific round among a plurality of types of special game states different only in the standby time. Although the configuration has been described, the probability that a game ball enters the specific path TA may be higher in the special game state in which the standby time is short immediately before the specific round. For example, as the interval time, the opening time elapses after the actuation of the combination operating device 435, and then the second round starts via the first round of a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). A configuration in which a plurality of special game states having different interval times between the first round and the second round may be generated is provided. A game ball that has passed through the combination operating device 435 downstream of the combination operating device 435 enters the specific passage TA. The second round is started so as to include a timing to generate a possible entry period, and a game ball can be entered into the specific path TA, or can be entered slightly after the timing at which the game ball enters. A special game state in which a formation period is generated and a game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA is generated, and the probability of the game ball entering the specific passage TA is varied. It may be. In the case where the game balls that have passed through the combination operating device 435 are configured to enter the specific path TA, the probability that the game balls enter the specific path TA is varied depending on a plurality of special game states having different interval times. For example, a plurality of special game states having different opening times may be generated, and the probability that the game ball enters the specific path TA with the subsequent first round as the specific round may be changed.

  Also, in the above-described pachinko machine 100, a case has been described in which the game balls that have passed through the right-side flow-down route KR may all advance to the entrance side of the specific passage TA, but the distribution mechanism 601 in the right-side flow-down route KR has been described. Further upstream, a control mechanism may be provided for controlling the flow of the game balls so that the game balls flow only at a fixed rate to the distribution mechanism 601 side. For example, a seesaw type structure in which the flowing direction is switched for each ball in a flow path in which the specific passage TA is located on the downstream side and a flow path in which the specific passage TA is not located on the downstream side is provided upstream of the distribution mechanism 601. One or more may be provided on the side, and the game ball may not advance to the specific path TA side only at a time interval that is a multiple of the firing time interval. This makes it possible to reduce the number of game balls heading to the specific passage TA in a situation where a possible entry period in which the game balls can enter the specific passage TA can be reduced. Settings and the like can be easily performed.

  In the above-described pachinko machine 100, a special game state of “16R big hit (V prize)” and a special game state of “16R big hit (V no prize)” are generated as a plurality of kinds of special game states different only in the standby time. However, it is not always necessary to change the probability that the game ball enters the specific path TA depending on the special game state in which only the standby time is different, and at least some of the allowable number of rounds in a certain round are changed, such as by changing the allowable number of rounds. The probability that the game ball enters the specific passage TA may be changed depending on the special game state in which other conditions are different. Even in this case, in a plurality of special game states having different probabilities that the game ball enters the specific passage TA, it is possible to simplify the control of the special game state by setting the control in some rounds to be the same. Preferred.

  In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the function of making the probability that a game ball enters the specific passage TA different depending on a plurality of types of special game states having different waiting times, and the downflow path leading to the specific passage TA at the time of a power failure. A power failure ball holding function for holding the game balls within a predetermined range, and a swing from before the timing when the game balls arrive at the distribution mechanism 601 which can be entered in a specific round. A case has been described in which a function is provided for performing control for continuing the launch of a game ball so as to be able to reach the minute mechanism 601. However, a gaming machine having at least one of these functions may be used. For example, a plurality of types of special game states having different interval times do not occur so that the probability of the game balls entering the specific passage TA is different, and the game balls enter the specific passage TA by operation control of the distribution mechanism 601 other than the interval time. It is good also as a structure from which the probability of approaching differs. Even in such a case, the game state transition control determined before the power failure by the power failure sphere holding function can be restored at the time of power recovery, and the specific passage TA can be set by setting the round end condition before the specific round. It is preferable to be able to prompt a firing operation so that the game ball can easily enter the specific passage TA in a situation where the game ball can enter.

  In the above-described pachinko machine 100, when the lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is won, the type of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result (for example, symbol identification value or stop symbol identification value). The special game state is determined to be constant according to the special game state, and the special game state in which the game ball can enter the specific passage TA and the special game state in which the special ball cannot be entered with the probability set for each type of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the condition, which of the special game states in which the availability of the game ball to the specific passage TA is different or not is determined. It may be determined. For example, even if the symbol identification value as the type of the special symbol is the same, the occurrence probability of the special game state in which the game ball can enter the specific path TA may be made different according to the game state in which the winning has occurred. For example, if the player wins the lottery relating to the second special symbol and the symbol identification value is “0”, a certain change is made at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the variable display is started) in the game that has won the lottery. In the gaming state, a special game state in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA with a probability of 100% occurs. In the time reduction game state, a special game in which a game ball can enter the specific passage TA with a probability of 0%. The main control board 920 may control to generate a state (that is, a special game state in which the game ball cannot enter the specific passage TA). In this case, for a plurality of symbol identification values, whether the game ball can enter the specific path TA with respect to the game state at a predetermined timing may be set differently, and thereby, with a probability corresponding to the game state. A gaming machine that generates a gaming state that is advantageous for the player can be provided. For example, in the winning of the second special symbol in the probability-variable gaming state, a probability-changing gaming state occurs with a probability of 100%, and in the winning of the second special symbol in the time-saving gaming state, the probability-changing gaming state occurs with a probability of 80%. These game state generation controls can be easily generated by special game states with different interval times.

  In the above-described pachinko machine 100, the configuration in which the distribution mechanism 601 is provided on the downstream side inside the lower large winning device 433 has been described. However, both the lower large winning device 433 and the distribution mechanism 601 are necessarily provided. It is not necessary to adopt a configuration in which the lower-prize winning device 433 is omitted, and only the distribution mechanism 601 operates in a specific round, and the distribution mechanism 601 causes the specific path TA and the other than the specific path (the non-specific path TB and the discharge path) to be removed. The game ball may be distributed to the exit).

  (5) In the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the configuration has been described in which the movable protruding pieces S1 to S5 withdraw from the flow path of the game sphere when a power failure occurs. The movable protruding pieces S1 to S5 maintain the state of protruding into the flow path of the game ball, exhibit a ball holding function during power failure and a function of suppressing improper entry, and keep the game ball flowing down the flow path leading to the specific passage TA constant. May be held within the range. In this case, the movable protruding piece S5 located at the most downstream position is provided inside the lower big winning device 1433, and the game ball that is supposed to surely enter the specific passage TA is more reliably moved to the specific passage TA. It is preferable because it can be held on a flowing down flow path.

  In addition, the processing in S2111 of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is omitted, and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 does not need to be turned off. During the period in which the pause flag is set, since no game ball flows down the right-side downflow route KR, no game ball enters the upper winning award 434A, and the player is set by the pause flag. This is because the number of game balls obtainable in the special game state does not increase.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, in a part of the special game state, when there is no downflow of the game ball in the right downflow path KR by the right strike detection switch 603 for a predetermined time, the abnormal launch state is detected. Although the configuration in which the temporary stop flag is set and the special game state is temporarily stopped has been described, the temporary stop flag may be set in place of or in addition to the above, in response to other conditions. For example, whether or not the player is performing a firing operation is detected based on the state of the contact sensor 254 of the firing operation device 250, and a pause flag is set based on at least one condition that the firing operation is being performed. In this case, the abnormal firing state is detected as a necessary condition for the player to intentionally perform the firing operation, and the player is responsible for the situation where the player does not intentionally perform the firing operation. It is possible to add a game property in which a special game state progresses.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to any one of the first and third embodiments, at least one of the movable projecting pieces S1 to S5 according to the second embodiment is connected to the right-side downflow path KR or the lower large winning device 433, 2433. May be provided inside.

  (6) The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, the pachinko machine may be configured to increase the expected value of a large hit until a large hit state occurs once (for example, two or three times) once the hit has occurred. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special game state on condition that a ball wins in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, the present invention may be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Furthermore, other than a pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball type pachinko and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine, and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a game machine such as a parrot in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing problems and effects as needed. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like. Further, the meanings and examples of the terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of the terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
Lottery means (for example, a winning random number counter and a jackpot initial value random number counter) for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, a first special symbol lottery or a second special symbol lottery);
Display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols) and then stopping and displaying the symbols in a combination according to the result of the predetermined lottery;
Game state control means for changing a game state to a specific game state (for example, a probable change game state) based on a win in the predetermined lottery;
A gaming machine including
A specific display in which a part of the plurality of symbols is stopped in a predetermined combination as an aspect of the variable display of the plurality of symbols executed in the display means and in a case where the predetermined lottery is not won. (E.g., reach display) including a variable display of a specific loss mode in which the plurality of symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the loss,
Selection means for selecting, from the plurality of control patterns, a control pattern (for example, a transition pattern) for controlling the execution of the variable display in the specific losing mode for each unit game in the specific gaming state. (For example, a jackpot symbol random number counter and a jackpot symbol initial value random number counter),
Two or more control patterns (for example, transition patterns) in which the allowable times of the allowable unit games (for example, the fixed reach generating unit game and the lottery reach generating unit game) corresponding to the unit games that allow the variable display in the specific loss mode are different. The plurality of control patterns (for example, 120 types of transition patterns) are defined so that the permissible number of permissible unit games is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, two times). A gaming machine characterized in that control is performed so as to prohibit variable display in the specific loss mode in different unit games.

  In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a configuration in which, when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery, a special game state is established over a predetermined number of unit games through a special game state, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state. ing. In such a gaming machine, in a specific gaming state, in a unit game that did not win a big hit, a variation mode of a symbol is determined by a lottery of a variation mode performed for each unit game, and a lost symbol is displayed via a reach display. The result of the jackpot lottery is notified in an aspect in which the lost symbol is displayed without performing the reach display. In addition, in the unit game which has won the big hit, the lottery result is notified in a mode in which the big hit symbol is displayed via the reach display.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in each unit game in the specific gaming state, a mode involving a reach display with a certain probability is selected by lottery when a big hit is not won. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may feel dissatisfied in a situation where the reach display is repeatedly generated during the specific game state and the winning is not achieved, and there is room for improvement in the playability of the specific game state.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 10, the gaming ability in the specific gaming state can be improved.

  In other words, in each control pattern, the allowable number of times of allowing the variable display in the specific losing mode is limited to a predetermined number or less. The winning in the lottery is confirmed. Therefore, even if the game progresses without winning the predetermined lottery in the specific game state, the number of times the specific display is executed increases toward the allowable number, so that as the game progresses, the winning of the predetermined lottery is determined. Expectations can be amplified. Thereby, the playability in the specific game state can be further improved.

  In addition, since the specific display does not repeatedly occur when the predetermined lottery is not won, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling dissatisfied because the specific display does not win even if the specific display repeatedly occurs. In addition, similarly to the case where the specific display generation lottery is performed for each unit game, the unit games for which the specific display occurs in the specific game state can be varied.

<Feature 11>
In the gaming machine according to feature 10,
The permissible unit game includes a fixed unit game (for example, a fixed reach generating unit game) that performs a fluctuation display in the specific loss mode,
In each of the plurality of control patterns, at least one unit game in the specific game state is assigned to the fixed unit game.

  In the gaming machine according to the eleventh feature, in the specific gaming state, a specific display that can be expected to win in a predetermined lottery is executed at least once, and whether or not to perform a variable display in a specific loss mode is determined in each allowable unit. As in the case of determining by lottery in a game, or in the case of determining by a lottery in each unit game whether or not to perform a variable display in a specific loss mode like a conventional gaming machine, a win in a predetermined lottery can be expected It is possible to prevent a situation where the specific display is not executed at all even if the specific display shifts to the specific game state.

<Feature 12>
In the gaming machine according to feature 10 or 11,
A gaming machine, wherein in all of the plurality of control patterns, the permissible unit game is not assigned to a predetermined number of unit games.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 12, if the predetermined lottery is not won, the specific display is not executed in the unit game of the predetermined number of times. Can be easily set as a unit game in which it is determined that the game has been won. In addition, a unit game to which a permissible unit game is not assigned can be set in accordance with a rule that is easy for a player to understand (for example, the number of eyes), and when a specific display occurs, it is determined whether the unit game is a winning-determined unit game. Easy-to-understand playability can be realized.

<Feature 20>
Lottery means (for example, a big hit symbol random number counter and a big hit symbol initial value random number counter) for performing a predetermined lottery, and display information generating means for generating display information (for example, a stopped symbol identification value) based on the lottery result by the lottery means (Stop symbol generation processing S1404), display means for displaying the display information (for example, special symbol display devices 471, 472 related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), and a game mode based on the lottery result ( For example, a gaming mode determining means for determining a transition pattern in a probable change gaming state),
The display information generating means generates a converted value by a predetermined operation (for example, a combination of a zero padding left bit shift operation and an exclusive OR operation) based on a value (for example, a symbol identification value) corresponding to the lottery result. Conversion means, and, when the conversion value generated by the conversion means is a predetermined value, comprises a replacement means for replacing the conversion value with a predetermined replacement value,
The display information is generated without performing the replacement by the replacement unit when the conversion value generated by the conversion unit is different from the predetermined value, and the conversion value generated by the conversion unit is the predetermined value. Wherein the game machine is generated through replacement by the replacement means.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a predetermined lottery result display is diversified, and based on the result display, a game progress mode depending on a predetermined lottery result cannot be easily determined. There is known a configuration for improving the playability in a game state after winning. For example, in the lottery transition to the special game state, it is difficult to easily determine which one of a plurality of different jackpots having different profits has been won. A configuration is provided in which a promotion effect to a jackpot with a high score is performed to improve the game performance.

  In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the result display mode is determined according to the random numbers by referring to a table indicating the correspondence between the random numbers used for the predetermined lottery and the result display modes. However, when the mode of the result display is determined based on the table, the data capacity for forming the table increases as the mode of the result display increases, and the display mode of the predetermined lottery result is diversified. There was room for improvement.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 20, the display mode of the predetermined lottery result can be suitably diversified, and the gaming performance in the game after winning the predetermined lottery can be improved.

  That is, based on display information (conversion value or replacement value) generated by a predetermined calculation based on the lottery result, the relevance of which is reduced, not the lottery result itself having a high relevance to the game mode in the display means. The lottery result is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for some players to infer the game mode based on the lottery result from the display on the display means. Thereby, the playability in the game state set based on the lottery result is improved. In addition, when the display information is generated by a predetermined calculation based on the lottery result, the display information is determined based on a table showing the correspondence between the lottery result and the display information, except for a part. As compared with the above, various display information can be easily generated without significantly increasing the program capacity and the data capacity. Further, when the converted value is a value that the user does not want to adopt as display information or a value that the user wants to use for another purpose, those values can be suitably excluded.

<Feature 21>
In the gaming machine according to feature 20,
The predetermined operation in the conversion unit includes a basic logical operation of generating a value including a bit array that is the same as an array of a predetermined bit range in the value from a value corresponding to the lottery result in a specific bit range, A gaming machine characterized by a combination of a basic logic operation of a value generated by the operation and a value corresponding to the lottery result.

  According to the configuration described in the feature 21, since the operation in the conversion unit is composed of only the basic logical operation, the conversion unit is compared with a case including an operation different from the basic logical operation such as general four arithmetic operations. Can be performed at high speed. Further, since the operation in the conversion means does not include the operation of exchanging the bit arrangement in the predetermined bit range, the operation can be performed at a higher speed than the case where the operation of exchanging the bit arrangement in the predetermined bit range is performed. As a result, the operation of the conversion means can be completed in one interrupt of the timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined interval, so that the delay of the next interrupt can be suppressed and the execution of the interrupt can be distributed and executed by a plurality of interrupts. As a result, the program can be simplified as compared with the case where the game is performed, and the progress of the game can be smoothly controlled.

<Feature 22>
In the gaming machine according to feature 20 or 21,
The predetermined value includes a minimum value represented by a plurality of bits constituting the display information, a value in a range of a predetermined minimum value side continuous from the minimum value, and a maximum value represented by the plurality of bits. Including a value on a predetermined maximum value side continuous to the maximum value,
The display means includes a display body corresponding to each of the plurality of bits and having a display mode determined according to a value of each of the bits, and a display mode in which all the display bodies have the same display mode. The lottery result is displayed in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode including the above.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 22, if the converted value is a value that the user does not want to adopt as display information or a value that the user wants to use for another purpose, those values can be easily eliminated.

<Feature 23>
In the gaming machine according to feature 22,
The display information is composed of the same number or a multiple of the number of basic operation bits,
The replacement means adds or subtracts a predetermined correction value to or from the conversion value generated by the conversion means, and sets a value in a predetermined minimum value range and a value in a predetermined maximum value range to be a continuous value. And determining whether or not to replace the converted value generated by the converting means with the predetermined replacement value, based on the continuous value.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 23, the values not desired to be adopted as the display information or the values desired to be used for other purposes are distributed into the minimum value range including the minimum value and the maximum value range including the maximum value. However, these ranges can be integrated into one continuous range by adding and subtracting predetermined values. Therefore, it can be determined at a time whether to replace the converted value with the predetermined replacement value, and the control process is simplified.

<Feature 24>
In the gaming machine according to feature 22 or 23,
The replacement unit adds a conversion value generated by the conversion unit and a value corresponding to the number of values included in the range on the predetermined maximum value side based on the multi-bit addition operation, and determines a determination value. Generated, when the determination value is less than the sum of the number of values included in the predetermined minimum value range and the number of values included in the predetermined maximum value range, the determination value is determined. A gaming machine, wherein the replacement value is replaced with a replacement value according to the determination value, and the replacement value is set as the display information.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 24, the minimum value range including the minimum value and the maximum value range including the maximum value can be integrated into a continuous range including the minimum value.

<Feature 25>
In the gaming machine according to feature 22 or 23,
The replacement unit generates a determination value by subtracting a value corresponding to the number of values included in the predetermined minimum value range from the conversion value generated by the conversion unit, and the determination value is the maximum value. If the value exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the sum of the number of values included in the predetermined minimum value range and the number of values included in the predetermined maximum value range, the determination value is determined. A gaming machine, wherein the replacement value is replaced with a replacement value according to the determination value, and the replacement value is set as the display information.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 25, the minimum value side range including the minimum value and the maximum value side range including the maximum value can be integrated into a continuous range including the maximum value.

<Feature 30>
Determining means (winning determination processing S1403 of the main control board 920) for determining whether a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Determination information display means (special symbol display devices 471, 472) for displaying information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means,
When the determination unit determines that the specific game start condition is satisfied, the player is compared with the normal game state by a combination of a plurality of unit games executed based on the satisfaction of the plurality of start conditions. A gaming machine provided with specific game state control means (each processing for controlling the positive game state of the main control board 920) for generating an advantageous specific game state (probable game state),
The specific game state control means is for generating a plurality of types of specific game states in which at least one of the content of the privilege granted to the player and the grant time is different,
The determining means determines whether or not a specific game start condition set corresponding to a plurality of types of specific game states is satisfied,
The determination information display means displays information corresponding to a specific game state in which control is started by the specific game state control means in a unit game based on a start condition in which the specific game start condition is satisfied,
Before the specific game state is started, one of a plurality of types of specific game states to be started is selected, and information corresponding to the specific game state to be executed is displayed by the determination information display means. A gaming machine.

  In conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and if a big hit is won by lottery based on that ball entry, a special game state is entered, and in the special game state, a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening Is known. Also, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, the winning probability of a big hit is higher than the normal gaming state, a certainty-changing gaming state, or a gaming state in which a game ball can easily enter the starting port from the normal gaming state. Is also known to add a variety of games (see, for example, JP-A-2005-074175).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to transition to an advantageous gaming state based on a lottery result performed by entering a game ball into the starting port, and therefore, to transition to an advantageous gaming state. There has been a problem that the game is likely to be a uniform game, such as placing importance on the result of each lottery. In addition, when an advantageous game state is newly provided, there is a problem in that there is a possibility that a fraud targeting the advantageous game state is performed.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 30, the continuous game constituted by the establishment of a plurality of start conditions as the specific game state can be executed by a plurality of types of patterns in which the content of the privilege or the grant time is at least different. Information corresponding to the content of the continuous game can be transmitted to a player or a manager of a game arcade as needed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying game characteristics and suppressing improper behavior by a continuous game constituted by a plurality of starting conditions being satisfied.

<Feature 31>
In the gaming machine according to feature 30,
The specific game state control means includes, as contents of the unit game executed when the start condition is satisfied, a condition for setting a variable time (variable time) and a privilege for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player. A plurality of control patterns in which at least some of the conditions for granting (small hit probability) and the contents of the privilege when the privilege granting condition is satisfied (the time allowed to enter the winning opening) are stored are stored. Pattern storage means (ROM of the main control board 920)
A gaming machine, wherein the specific game state is generated by controlling the unit game with a control pattern corresponding to the number of executions of the unit game from the start to the end of the specific game state.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 31, before the specific gaming state is started, it is possible to set the content and timing at which the privilege is to be given in advance, and to provide the player with information corresponding to the content in advance. Expect early on the new game, in which the benefits are granted across multiple unit games, compared to the game, in which the benefits are simply granted by winning one unit game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be combined with an effect to be performed. In addition, by applying a plurality of control patterns to each unit game, it is possible to control a specific game state constituted by a plurality of unit games, so that it is easy to control a privilege given by executing the specific game state. be able to.

<Feature 32>
In the gaming machine according to feature 30 or 31,
A privilege grant information display means (hold information output setting processing S1707) for displaying privilege grant time information corresponding to the grant time of the privilege granted to the player during the specific game state;
The specific game state control means sets a privilege-added game state (probable change state D) in which a unit game in which a player is more likely to receive a privilege than a normal game state a plurality of times consecutively, as compared with a privilege-added game state. The specific game state is generated by executing the game state (probably changed states A to C) in which the unit game in which it is difficult to give is performed a plurality of times, and the special game state is started. A plurality of types of specific game states in which the number of executions of the unit game until the granted game state is started are generated,
The award providing information display means is configured to execute at least a part (fixed) of the award providing time information before the award providing game state is started and after a start condition of a unit game in which the award providing game state is started is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by displaying a back-preceding effect display).

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 32, during the specific gaming state, a plurality of unit games are executed before the privilege-giving gaming state is started. A period in which a game is executed in expectation of a game state can be set. Then, after the start condition of the unit game in which the privilege providing game state is started during the period is established, the privilege providing time information is displayed by the privilege providing information display means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the grant of the privilege is invalidated according to the progress of the game after the privilege grant time information is displayed, or that the starting condition is difficult to be satisfied, so that it is not possible to satisfy the starting condition. Privilege grant time information can be displayed at a suitable timing that does not cause inconvenience such as forcing the player to consume a considerable amount of time and game balls.

<Feature 33>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 30 to 32,
The specific game state control means, when a predetermined privilege provision condition is satisfied during the specific game state, executes another game from the specific game state being executed before a predetermined number of unit games are executed. A gaming machine characterized by transitioning to a state.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 33, a situation may occur in which the specific gaming state ends without necessarily waiting for a predetermined number of unit games. For this reason, even if information corresponding to the specific game state is displayed by the information display means, the progress of the subsequent game can be diversified, and the content of the specific game state is uniquely selected before the start. Thus, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the subsequent game feels monotonous. In addition, since the game shifts to another game state when the privilege grant condition is satisfied, another privilege is provided to the player even if at least some of the benefits expected during the specific game state are not provided to the player. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the discourage of the player as compared with the case where a part of the specific game state is simply lost.

<Feature 34>
In the gaming machine described in the features 30 to 33,
A ball entry unit (lower prize winning device 433) to which a predetermined privilege is given to a player when a game ball enters,
An easy entry state in which game balls can enter the entry section, a state in which game balls cannot enter the entry section from the entry enable state, or a game ball cannot enter the entry section. Ball entry state switching means (downward entry control solenoid 463) for generating a ball entry difficult state corresponding to a difficult state,
The specific game control means controls the ball entry state switching means when the predetermined state continuation winning condition is established during the specific game state based on the establishment of the start condition, and sets the easy ball entry state in advance. A possible ball entry state generating means (special symbol-related processing S1217) to be generated over a predetermined entry possible period;
A variable time selecting means (special symbol change start time setting processing S1405) for selecting a time of a variable display executed before displaying information corresponding to establishment of the state continuation winning condition,
The variation time selection means may determine the variation time of the unit game based on a plurality of types of variation time selection conditions having different lengths of the variation time selected according to the number of unit games executed in the specific game state. A gaming machine characterized by selection.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 34, by controlling the fluctuating time, it is possible to control the ratio of the time during which the possible ball entry period occurs during the specific gaming state, thereby simplifying the control of the specific gaming state while playing the game. Can be varied. In addition, during the specific game state, only a period in which the length of the fluctuation time is varied by, for example, continuously generating a plurality of unit games in which the fluctuation time is short and the ball entry possible period is long is different. A privilege can be efficiently provided to a player at a predetermined timing.

<Feature 40>
Determining means (winning determination processing S1403 of the main control board 920) for determining whether a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Identification information display means (decorative symbol display device 479) for performing a fluctuation display when the start condition is satisfied, and displaying information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means after the fluctuation display;
Information display control means (main control board 920 and sub-control board 940) for controlling display contents of the identification information display means,
When the determination unit determines that the specific game start condition is satisfied, the player is compared with the normal game state by a combination of a plurality of unit games executed based on the satisfaction of the plurality of start conditions. A gaming machine provided with specific game state control means (each processing for controlling the positive game state of the main control board 920) for generating an advantageous specific game state (probable game state),
A holding unit (a function of holding the unit game of the main control board 920) capable of holding the execution of the unit game based on the establishment of another start condition established during the execution of the unit game based on the establishment of the first start condition;
The specific game state control means is for generating a plurality of types of specific game states in which the award of the privilege to be provided to the player is different,
The information display control unit is configured to display information corresponding to the grant time of the privilege in the specific game state in which the control is started by the specific game state control unit before the start condition of the unit game in which the privilege is provided is satisfied. (A processing of S1908 and S1912 of the hold information output setting processing S1707),
During a period in which the start condition of the unit game in which the grant is executed is satisfied and the execution of the unit game is suspended by the suspending unit, in a mode different from the display by the first grant time display unit. A gaming machine comprising: a second grant time display means (processing of S1910 of the hold information output setting processing S1707) for displaying information corresponding to the grant time of the privilege.

  In conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and if a big hit is won by lottery based on that ball entry, a special game state is entered, and in the special game state, a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening Is known. Also, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, the winning probability of a big hit is higher than the normal gaming state, a certainty-changing gaming state, or a gaming state in which a game ball can easily enter the starting port from the normal gaming state. Is also known to add a variety of games (see, for example, JP-A-2005-074175).

  However, since whether or not to transition to an advantageous gaming state is determined by a lottery result performed by entering a game ball into the starting port, the starting condition of the game as to whether or not to transition to an advantageous gaming state is determined. Unless established, it is not possible to execute an effect corresponding to the lottery result, and even if the game has a hold function, there is a problem that the effect cannot be obtained for a game whose execution has been held. .

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 40, it is possible to execute a continuous game constituted by the establishment of a plurality of start conditions as a specific game state by a plurality of types of patterns in which the award of the privilege is different. The grant time is displayed by the first grant time display means after the start condition of the unit game in which the privilege is granted is satisfied, and is displayed by the second grant time display means even before the start condition is satisfied. You. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the award of the privilege from an earlier stage before the establishment of the start condition corresponding to the unit game at the time of the award of the privilege, or to increase the expectation for the award of the benefit step by step. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an effect associated with a continuous game constituted by establishing a plurality of starting conditions, such as executing a number of effects.

<Feature 41>
In the gaming machine according to feature 40,
The specific game state control means includes a pattern storage means (main control board 920) for storing at least a plurality of control patterns having different setting conditions of the variation time as the content of the unit game executed when the start condition is satisfied. ROM)
A gaming machine, wherein the specific game state is generated by controlling the unit game with a control pattern corresponding to the number of executions of the unit game from the start to the end of the specific game state.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 41, by applying a plurality of control patterns to each unit game, it is possible to control at least the fluctuation time of the variable display in the specific game state constituted by a plurality of unit games. Combining the effect corresponding to the award grant time and the fluctuating time, the fluctuating display with a long fluctuating time corresponds to the award time of the award, thereby making it easier for the player to pay attention to the unit game expecting the award time of the award. Thus, it is possible to suitably execute an effect indicating the timing of giving the privilege.

<Feature 42>
In the gaming machine according to the feature 40 or 41,
A unit game number storage unit that stores information corresponding to the number of executions of the unit game in the specific game state,
When the start condition is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the unit game is suspended by the suspension means, the execution time of the unit game in which the start condition is satisfied is based on the information stored in the unit game number storage unit. Execution time deriving means for deriving (processing of S1805 to S1807 of the hold information output setting processing S1707),
The second grant time display means displays information corresponding to the grant time according to whether or not the execution time of the unit game derived by the execution time deriving means corresponds to the privilege grant time. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 42, the execution time of the unit game in which the start condition is satisfied is derived based on the information corresponding to the number of executions of the unit game in the specific game state. For this reason, compared with the case where the number of executions of the unit game corresponding to the execution time of the unit game for which the start condition is satisfied and the number of executions of the unit game in progress in the specific game state are separately managed. In addition, it is possible to reduce the storage area of the RAM used as the unit game number storage unit, and to reduce the possibility that the synchronization of the update of both times is broken.

<Feature 43>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 40 to 42,
The second grant time display means displays information corresponding to the privilege grant time before the execution of the specific game state starts (the processing of S1908 and S1912 of the hold information output setting processing S1707). A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 43, information corresponding to the content of the continuous game in the specific gaming state can be transmitted to a player or a manager of a game arcade as needed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of diversifying the playability of a continuous game and suppressing illegal acts.

<Feature 50>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given more than a normal gaming state is more likely to be established when a predetermined winning condition is established, wherein the special gaming state combines a plurality of rounds Gaming machine configured with
A game ball can be distributed to a plurality of regions including a specific region (specific passage TA), and an attainable state (guidance posture) in which the game ball can enter the specific region in at least a part of the plurality of rounds is set. A distributing mechanism that can be generated (distributing mechanisms 601 and 1601);
A switching mechanism (upper prize winning device 434, 1434) provided upstream of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not a game ball is advanced to the distribution mechanism side;
An operation control means for performing the control including the operation control of the distributing mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state (the distributing mechanisms 601 and 1601 on the main control board 920 and the control units of the upper winning award device 434 and 1434) )When,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control unit (a control unit for the game state in the main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area. Prepared,
The operation control means may be configured such that the game ball whose traveling direction is controlled by the switching mechanism passes through a predetermined area before the start of a predetermined round (specific round) in which the approachable state occurs, or a predetermined time. A predetermined round start preparation condition including at least one of the elapsed times is satisfied, and after the round start preparation condition is satisfied, at least two or more different standby times (“0.5 seconds” and “3 seconds”) are set. .0 seconds ”), the distributing mechanism is controlled to the approachable state to start the predetermined round after any one of the predetermined rounds has elapsed.
The special game states having different standby times include a first special game state (a special game state of 16R jackpot (V non-winning)) and a second special game state (16R jackpot) having a longer standby time than the first special game state. (V prize) special game state)
A gaming machine, wherein the probability that a game ball enters the specific area differs according to the length of the standby time.

  Conventional gaming machines are provided with a variable winning device that takes an entry-permissible state that allows a game ball to enter when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When a game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area, the player There is known a gaming machine that is in a gaming state that is advantageous for the player (see, for example, JP-A-2009-28117).

  In the conventional gaming machine described above, whether or not a game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area is determined by a substantially constant probability corresponding to an operation of allowing the game ball to enter the variable winning device. There is room for improvement in the form in which game balls enter a specific area.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a game ball to appropriately enter a specific area where a gaming state advantageous to a player is generated. That is, by changing the length of the waiting time before the start of the specific round, it is possible to change the probability that the game ball enters the specific area, so that at least one of the control patterns by the operation control means for a plurality of types of special game states. The sections can be easily shared and the control can be simplified, and the probabilities of entering the specific area can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the probability of a gaming ball entering a specific area that affects the transition of the gaming state while suppressing an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

  Note that, in the gaming machine described in the feature 50, the term "through the switching mechanism" means that the game machine passes through a position at which the traveling direction of the game ball is switched by the switching mechanism. This includes a case where the game ball does not contact the switching mechanism, such as when the ball flows down, and a case where the ball passes through a position where the switching mechanism can contact when the switching mechanism operates.

<Feature 51>
In the gaming machine according to feature 50,
After the elapse of the standby time, the operation pattern of the distribution mechanism by the operation control means and the operation end condition are the same, and the round is started according to the length of the standby time corresponding to the type of special game state. The timing at which the approachable state occurs after the preparation condition is satisfied is different, and at the timing when the game ball via the switching mechanism reaches the distribution mechanism after the round start preparation condition is satisfied, the identification by the distribution mechanism is performed. A gaming machine, wherein the probability that a game ball enters a region differs according to the length of the standby time.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 51, even if the operation control of the distribution mechanism in the specific round is the same, the game ball enters the specific area by changing the length of the standby time before the start of the specific round. Probabilities can be different. Therefore, it is easy to share at least a part of the control pattern allowing the game ball to enter the specific area by the operation control means for a plurality of kinds of special game states, and the control can be further simplified. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the probability of a game ball entering a specific area that affects the transition of the gaming state while suppressing an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

<Feature 52>
In the gaming machine according to the feature 50 or 51,
The operation control means controls the first special game state and the second special game state, in which the length of the standby time is different, from the start of the plurality of rounds until the end condition in each round is satisfied. A gaming machine, wherein an operation pattern of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism generates a special game state set to be identical in the first special game state and the second special game state.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 52, the operation pattern from the start of a plurality of rounds in the first special game state and the second special game state to the end condition of each round is set to be the same. Therefore, control of a plurality of types of special game states having different entry probabilities into the specific area can be further easily shared.

  Note that, in the gaming machine described in the feature 52, the start of a plurality of rounds may be a timing when the game ball enters a predetermined winning opening where a winning condition is satisfied, and enters a permissible entry state in which a game ball can enter. May be set to one or two or more.

<Feature 53>
In the gaming machine according to feature 52,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, a big hit symbol random number counter and a big hit symbol initial value random number counter);
Information display means (for example, special symbol display devices 471 and 472 relating to a first special symbol and a second special symbol) for displaying display information corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the predetermined display information (stop symbol identification value) is stop-displayed as the display information on the information display means, the operation control means is configured to control the first special game state and the second special game state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to generate.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 53, even if the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed by the information display means, two kinds of special game states having different probabilities of whether or not the game ball enters the specific area occur. . Therefore, without increasing the pattern of the display information corresponding to the winning in the predetermined lottery, the transition control of the gaming state can be complicated and the diversification of the game can be achieved. In addition, when the same display information is stopped and displayed, the operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism during the special game state can be easily shared, and the same type of display information is given to the player. The apparent value can be made substantially the same so that the player is less likely to be dissatisfied.

<Feature 54>
In the gaming machine according to feature 53,
The operation control means, when the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed on the information display means, from when a start condition of the game in which the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed is satisfied until the game is ended. A gaming machine wherein a decision is made as to which of the first special gaming state and the second gaming state to execute depending on the type of gaming state at a predetermined timing.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 54, when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed, the transition probability of the gaming state to be shifted after the special gaming state according to the gaming state at a predetermined timing in the variable display. Can add different playability. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the gaming machine by suppressing the increase in the type of display information and the complexity of the control in the special gaming state while diversifying the transition pattern of the gaming state.

  Note that, in the gaming machine described in the feature 54, the predetermined timing may be a timing at which a start winning prize occurs with respect to the fluctuation display in which the predetermined display information is stopped, or the fluctuation in which the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed. The timing at which the display is started may be set, or the timing at which the variable display in which the predetermined display information is stopped and displayed may be ended.

  Whether the first special game state or the second special game state is to be executed according to the type of the game state means that the first special game state and the first special game state completely correspond to the type of the game state. Which of the second special game state to execute may be determined, and which of the first special game state and the second special game state to execute is determined according to the probability set in the type of game state. Alternatively, it may be determined which of the first special game state and the second special game state is to be executed from a game state including another special game state.

<Feature 55>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 50 to 54,
The distribution mechanism is provided on a flow-down route (a route leading to the entrance of the specific passage TA via the connection passage KD) from the entrance of the game region to the specific region, and is provided so that a game ball can enter the specific region. A downstream distributing mechanism (distributing mechanisms 601 and 1601) capable of shifting between a possible state and a state in which a game ball does not enter the specific area.
The switching mechanism is provided at a position on the upstream side of the flow-down path with respect to the downstream-side distribution mechanism and at least a predetermined shortest flow-down time is required for path separation, and the downstream side along the flow-down path. An upstream distribution mechanism (upward entry restriction mechanisms 454, 1454) that can transition between a flowable state in which the game balls can flow down to the distribution mechanism side and a non-flowable state in which the game balls cannot flow down,
As the operation control means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a lottery for a special symbol is won), the upstream distribution mechanism is set to the non-flowable state, and after the non-flowable period, the upstream distribution mechanism is operated. An upstream-side control unit (control unit of the upper entry control mechanisms 454 and 1454) for generating a flowable period for setting the flowable state;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the downstream distribution mechanism is provided in a period including at least a pre-set entry period after the minimum entry time after the shortest entry time has elapsed from the start of the entry period. A downstream-side entry control unit (control unit of the distribution mechanisms 601 and 1601 by the main control board 920) for controlling the entry state and allowing the game ball to enter the specific area;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the inaccessible state of the downstream sorting mechanism is generated in the inaccessible period earlier than the shortest possible time, and the state is shifted to the inaccessible state at a time earlier than the shortest available time. A gaming machine provided with a downstream-side inaccessibility control means (control unit of the distribution mechanisms 601 and 1601 by the main control board 920) for making a game ball unable to enter the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 55, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, even when the game ball enters the specific area by the control of the downstream entry control means, the control by the downstream entry disable control means is performed. Even when the game ball does not enter the specific area, since both the upstream distribution mechanism and the downstream distribution mechanism operate, there is a possibility that the game ball may advance to the specific area when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This can be shown in a way that is easy to understand through the visual sense of the player.

  In particular, even when the game ball does not enter the specific area under the control of the downstream entry impossible control means, the entry state is generated by the downstream distribution mechanism. For this reason, the game ball flows down from the upstream distribution mechanism to the downstream distribution mechanism which is in a state in which it can enter, and it is possible to generate an opportunity for the player to pay attention to the behavior of the game ball. . Therefore, the result of the lottery corresponding to the destination of the subsequent game ball can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the occurrence of an advantageous game state can be appropriately notified to the player using the flow of the game ball. Machine can be provided.

<Feature 56>
The gaming machine according to feature 55,
As the gaming state in which the predetermined condition can be satisfied, a plurality of gaming states including the advantageous gaming state are provided,
As the plurality of game states, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution ratio between the downstream-side entry control means and the downstream-side entry impossible control means is different, and the probability that the advantageous game state occurs is different. A gaming machine characterized by including states (a normal gaming state, a probable changing gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state).

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 56, the probability of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state differs according to the gaming state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. It can be expected that a gaming state will occur. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a sense of expectation to the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state.

  Note that, in the gaming machine described in the feature 55, the plurality of gaming states are different in any one of the probability of establishment of a predetermined condition and the ease with which a game ball enters a predetermined starting area, or a combination thereof. The game may have different types of gaming states.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the feature 56, when the game ball enters, the variable display is executed, and the display information (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) which is displayed as a result as to whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied is displayed. ) Are set and a plurality of starting areas are set corresponding to the respective display information. In a case where a predetermined condition is satisfied according to the starting area in which the game ball has entered in a plurality of game states. The execution ratio of the downstream entry control means and the downstream entry control means may be different from each other, and the probability that a game ball may enter a specific area to generate an advantageous game state may be different.

<Feature 57>
The gaming machine according to feature 56,
Whether the entry is allowed or not is controlled by the upstream distribution mechanism, and when the upstream distribution mechanism is set to the unflowable state, upper winning ports (upper winning ports 434A and 1434A) through which game balls can enter;
Whether the entry is allowed or not is controlled by the downstream distribution mechanism, and when the downstream distribution mechanism is set to the entry enabled state, the lower prize ports (lower prize ports 433A and 1433A) into which game balls can enter are provided. With
The specific area is configured to be able to enter through the lower winning opening,
The upstream distribution mechanism is in a flowable state in which game balls can flow down to the downstream distribution mechanism in a normal game state, and generates the flow-disabled state in a partial period of the special game state to generate an inflowable state. It is to let game balls enter the winning opening,
The operation control means controls the operation of the upstream distribution mechanism and the downstream distribution mechanism in accordance with the types of the conditions set as the plurality of predetermined conditions, and determines whether the game ball can enter the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by controlling.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 57, the gaming ball enters the upper winning opening in a situation where the upstream distribution mechanism is in the state of being unable to flow down, so that the specific region is located on the downstream path on the downstream side. The firing operation for the prize can be adjusted depending on the situation in which a prize is generated in the upper prize port. Then, by simply continuing the firing operation in which a prize is generated in the upper winning port, the game ball can enter the specific area through the lower winning port. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player mistakenly performs the firing operation and invalidates the generation of the advantageous gaming state.

<Feature 60>
A distributing mechanism (distributing mechanisms 601 and 1601) capable of distributing game balls to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific path TA) and generating an approachable state in which game balls can enter the specific area; ,
Operation control means for controlling the operation of the distribution mechanism (control units of the distribution mechanisms 601 and 1601 by the main control board 920);
A game state control unit (a game state control unit on the main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area when the game ball enters the specific area;
A power failure sphere holding means (ball transport device 602, provided upstream of the distribution mechanism, for holding, within a predetermined range, game balls flowing down a flow path leading to the specific area when a power failure occurs. A gaming machine comprising: movable protruding pieces S1 to S5).

  Conventional gaming machines are provided with a variable winning device that takes an entry-permissible state that allows a game ball to enter when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When a game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area, the player There is known a gaming machine that is in a gaming state that is advantageous for the player (see, for example, JP-A-2009-28117).

  In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the power supply to the inside of the gaming machine is recovered from the stoppage of the power supply which has been unexpectedly generated due to a power failure or the like, the gaming machine is substantially the same as the state at the time of the stoppage of the power supply by the backup function. Even if the control is returned from the state, the player may be disadvantaged.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 60, there is provided a gaming machine capable of reducing a possibility that a player suffers a disadvantage with respect to entry of a game ball into a specific area that generates a gaming state advantageous to the player. can do. In other words, when a power failure occurs in a situation where a game ball that was supposed to pass through the specific area is flowing down the downflow path leading to the specific area, the game ball is held within a predetermined range by the power holding sphere holding means. be able to. Therefore, after the power of the gaming machine is restored, the flow of the game balls toward the specific area can be restarted to make it easier for the game balls to enter the specific area, and the game which was properly played due to an unexpected situation This can make it easier for the person to avoid disadvantage.

<Feature 61>
The gaming machine according to feature 60,
A gaming machine, wherein the power failure ball holding means holds game balls at a plurality of locations along the flow-down path.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 61, the game sphere can be held on the upstream side and the downstream side along the downflow path leading to the specific area, so that the downstream side flows down toward the specific area. It is possible to hold the game balls that have been played, and to prevent the game balls that flow down with a delay from the timing of entering the specific area on the upstream side from flowing down to the downstream side. Therefore, the state of whether or not a game ball flows down to a specific region corresponding to the game state transition control determined before the power failure is stored in the game region, and the flow of the game ball is easily restored after the power is restored. Can be.

<Feature 62>
In the gaming machine according to the feature 60 or 61,
A switching mechanism (upper winning device 434, 1434, lower winning device 433, 1433) provided upstream of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to the specific area side;
The gaming machine, wherein the power-failure-time ball holding means holds the game ball downstream of the switching mechanism and upstream of the distribution mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 62, it is possible to efficiently hold the game balls heading to the specific area only during the power outage by limiting the game balls that have flowed down to the distribution mechanism side by the switching mechanism, and are determined before the power outage. It is possible to efficiently restore the flow of the game ball corresponding to the transition control of the game state after the power failure.

<Feature 70>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given more than a normal gaming state is more likely to be established when a predetermined winning condition is established, wherein the special gaming state combines a plurality of rounds Gaming machine configured with
A game ball can be distributed to a plurality of areas including a specific area (specific path TA), and an attainable state in which a game ball can enter the specific area in at least a part of the plurality of rounds can be generated. Distribution mechanism (distribution mechanism 601, 1601);
A switching mechanism (upper prize winning device 434, 1434, lower prize winning device) provided upstream or downstream of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance the game ball to a prize area where the prize conditions are satisfied. 433, 1433),
Operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching mechanism and the distribution mechanism to generate the special game state (controllers for the upper prize winning devices 434 and 1434 and the distribution mechanisms 601 and 1601 on the main control board 920);
A game state control unit (a game state control unit on the main control board 920) for generating a more advantageous specific game state when the game ball is guided to the specific area than when the game ball is not guided to the specific area; With
A special game state including one or more rounds is provided before a predetermined round for generating the approachable state,
When the predetermined round is started, the distribution mechanism is set to be able to enter in the predetermined round before the game ball reaches the timing before the game ball reaches the distribution mechanism. It is characterized by having a firing continuation control means (control section of a fifth round having a different allowable number of entrances compared to before the fourth round by the main control board 920) for controlling to continue firing of the game balls. Gaming machine.

  Conventional gaming machines are provided with a variable winning device that takes an entry-permissible state that allows a game ball to enter when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When a game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area, the player There is known a gaming machine that is in a gaming state that is advantageous for the player (see, for example, JP-A-2009-28117).

  In the conventional gaming machine described above, whether or not a game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area is determined by a substantially constant probability corresponding to an operation of allowing the game ball to enter the variable winning device. There is room for improvement in the form in which game balls enter a specific area.

  In addition, even if an advantageous situation occurs for a player who easily enters the game ball into the specific area, if the player does not perform the firing operation, the advantageous situation may be wasted, It is possible that some players may suffer disadvantages. That is, it is preferable to use a gaming machine that allows a player to appropriately perform a firing operation in order to allow a game ball to enter a specific area, and there is still room for improvement.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 70, in a case where a predetermined round is generated in which at least a part of the plurality of rounds generates a state in which a game ball can enter a specific area, an approach state is entered. Control for continuing the firing of the game ball so that it can reach the distribution mechanism from before the timing when the game ball reaches the distributing mechanism that is in the enabled state is performed by the firing continuation control means. Will be For this reason, the player intentionally stops firing the game balls at a timing when it is necessary to continue firing the game balls in the special game state, and the game is distributed to the distribution mechanism which is set in a state in which the game balls can enter in a predetermined round. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball does not reach and the player suffers disadvantage.

<Feature 71>
The gaming machine according to feature 70,
The firing continuation control means may determine that, for one or more rounds executed two or more times before the predetermined round, the allowable number of times that the winning condition of the round executed immediately before the predetermined round is satisfied is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by performing control for generating different special gaming states.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 71, the round executed immediately before the predetermined round differs in the allowable number of times that the winning condition is satisfied with respect to the previous round. Even if the game is played while counting the number of shot balls so as not to shoot more game balls than the number of times to be established, extra game balls are likely to be straddled after the end of the previous round. Therefore, the situation in which the game ball can reach the distribution mechanism immediately after the start of the predetermined round because the player can easily continue firing the game ball immediately after the start of the predetermined round so that the game ball flows down the game area. Can be easily generated, and a situation where the player suffers a disadvantage can be easily avoided.

  Note that, in the gaming machine described in the feature 71, a round in which the allowable number of times that the winning condition is satisfied is small is compared with one or a plurality of rounds executed two or more times earlier than the predetermined round. The number of permitted winning entrances that can be established may be reduced, or the maximum allowable time may be reduced.

<Feature 72>
In the gaming machine according to the feature 70 or 71,
The operation control means controls a subsequent round after a predetermined interval time elapses between a plurality of rounds,
The firing continuation control means may include an interval time before the execution of the immediately preceding round executed immediately before the predetermined round, and an interval time before the execution of one or more rounds executed before the immediately preceding round. A gaming machine characterized by performing control for generating a special gaming state having a longer interval time.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 72, the special gaming state in which the interval time before execution of one or more rounds executed before the immediately preceding round is longer than the interval time before execution of the immediately preceding round is performed. Occurs. When the player feels that the interval time is long, it is easy to stop firing of the game ball in order to suppress unnecessary firing of the game ball, and when the interval time is short, it is easy to continue firing the game ball without stopping the firing. . For this reason, if the interval time is short before the execution of the immediately preceding round, it becomes easier to continue firing the game balls in an attempt to win the game balls efficiently even in a predetermined round thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to easily generate a situation in which the game ball can reach the distribution mechanism immediately after the start of the predetermined round, and to easily avoid a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage.

<Feature 73>
In the gaming machine according to any one of the features 70 to 72,
Launching means (launching device 330) for launching a game ball to a game area at a predetermined launching time interval by a predetermined launching operation by a player;
The firing continuation control means sets an interval time before execution of one or more rounds including before execution of the immediately preceding round executed immediately before the predetermined round as a predetermined time equal to or less than the firing time interval. A gaming machine characterized by performing control for generating a special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 73, since the interval time is set to a predetermined time equal to or less than the game ball firing time interval, even if the game ball continues to be fired during the interval time, it is compared with the case where the game ball is fired. It is difficult to generate useless game balls for which the winning condition is not satisfied. For this reason, at least before the execution of the round immediately before the predetermined round, the player is informed in advance of the possibility that the special game state in which useless play of the game ball is suppressed even if the play of the game ball is continued is suppressed. can do. Therefore, it is easy for the launch of the game ball to continue from the end of the immediately preceding round to the start of the predetermined round, and it is easy to generate a situation where the game ball can reach the distribution mechanism. It is easy to avoid a situation in which a profit is incurred.

<Feature 80>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given more than a normal gaming state is more likely to be established when a predetermined winning condition is established, wherein the special gaming state combines a plurality of rounds Gaming machine configured with
A game ball can be distributed to a plurality of regions including a specific region (specific passage TA), and an attainable state (guidance posture) in which the game ball can enter the specific region in at least a part of the plurality of rounds is set. A distributing mechanism that can be generated (distributing mechanisms 601 and 1601);
A switching mechanism (upper prize winning device 434, 1434) provided upstream of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not a game ball is advanced to the distribution mechanism side;
An operation control means for performing the control including the operation control of the distributing mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state (the distributing mechanisms 601 and 1601 on the main control board 920 and the control units of the upper winning award device 434 and 1434) )When,
A game state control unit (a game state control unit on the main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area when the game ball enters the specific area;
A firing abnormality detection means (right-handed detection switch 603) for detecting whether or not a predetermined abnormal firing state has occurred;
An abnormality handling control means (timer update processing S1210 of the main control board 920, a processing for accepting a winning big win S1309, Upper-prize winning prohibited processing S1310).
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state of a 16R big hit (V non-winning)) and a second special game state in which a probability that a game ball enters the specific area is higher than in the first special game state. Game state (special game state of 16R big hit (V winning)) is provided,
The abnormality handling control means stops the progress of at least a part of the game when the predetermined abnormal firing state is detected by the abnormal firing detecting means in at least a part of the second special gaming state, and When the abnormal state is released, the game machine controls the game in which the progress is stopped.

  Conventional gaming machines are provided with a variable winning device that takes an entry-permissible state that allows a game ball to enter when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When a game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area, the player There is known a gaming machine that is in a gaming state that is advantageous for the player (see, for example, JP-A-2009-28117).

  In the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if a state in which a game ball can enter a specific area occurs, if the launch of the game ball is not performed normally at that timing, the chance of turning is invalidated, and the player Could be disadvantaged.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, there is provided a gaming machine capable of reducing a possibility that a player suffers a disadvantage with respect to entry of a game ball into a specific area which generates a gaming state advantageous to the player. can do. That is, when the second special game state occurs and the game ball is in a firing abnormal state in which the game ball is not normally fired, at least a part of the progress of the game is stopped. For this reason, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a game ball is not fired in a situation where the game ball can enter a specific area, and to easily avoid a situation in which a player who has properly played a game suffers a disadvantage. .

<Feature 81>
The gaming machine according to feature 80,
The firing abnormality detection means is provided in a part of the game area and upstream of the distribution mechanism, and includes ball detection means capable of detecting the passage of a game ball flowing down to the distribution mechanism side,
A gaming machine, wherein the abnormality handling control means controls at least a part of the progress of a game in accordance with a result of detection of a game ball by the ball detection means.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 81, the state where the game ball is not flowing down to the distribution mechanism side is appropriately detected, and when a predetermined abnormal firing state occurs, the control corresponding to the state is appropriately performed. Can be performed.

<Feature 82>
In the gaming machine according to feature 80 or 81,
A time information updating unit that updates time information corresponding to the progress of the special game state,
The abnormality handling control means stops the easy winning control when the predetermined firing abnormal state is detected in a situation where the easy winning control that easily establishes the winning condition is executed by the operation control means. A gaming machine, wherein the updating of the time information by the time information updating means is stopped, and the progress of at least a part of the game is stopped.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 82, by suspending the occurrence of the advantageous state for the player, the advantageous state in which the prize-winning condition is easily established as compared with other players is generated for a long time. Without causing misunderstanding, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where a player who has properly played a game suffers a disadvantage.

<Feature 90>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given more than a normal gaming state is more likely to be established when a predetermined winning condition is established, wherein the special gaming state combines a plurality of rounds Gaming machine configured with
A game ball can be distributed to a plurality of regions including a specific region (specific passage TA), and an attainable state (guidance posture) in which the game ball can enter the specific region in at least a part of the plurality of rounds is set. A distributing mechanism that can be generated (distributing mechanisms 601 and 1601);
A switching mechanism (upper prize winning device 434, 1434) provided upstream of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not a game ball is advanced to the distribution mechanism side;
An operation control means for performing the control including the operation control of the distributing mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state (the distributing mechanisms 601 and 1601 on the main control board 920 and the control units of the upper winning award device 434 and 1434) )When,
A game state control unit (a game state control unit on the main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area when the game ball enters the specific area;
Power failure detection means (part of the power failure monitoring process S9202) for detecting whether or not a predetermined power failure state has occurred;
Power outage control means (each processing of the main control board 920 when the power outage preparation flag is on) for performing predetermined power outage corresponding control when the predetermined power outage state is detected by the power outage detection means;
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state of a 16R big hit (V non-winning)) and a second special game state in which a probability that a game ball enters the specific area is higher than in the first special game state. Game state (special game state of 16R big hit (V winning)) is provided,
The power outage control unit is configured to execute the special game state as the predetermined power outage corresponding control in a predetermined period including a period in which the predetermined power outage state is detected by the power outage detection unit and in which the approachable state is generated. A gaming machine characterized by executing a control for causing a game to proceed.

  Conventional gaming machines are provided with a variable winning device that takes an entry-permissible state that allows a game ball to enter when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When a game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area, the player There is known a gaming machine that is in a gaming state that is advantageous for the player (see, for example, JP-A-2009-28117).

  In the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if a state in which a game ball can enter a specific area occurs, if a power failure occurs at that timing, the chance of turning is invalidated, and the player loses a disadvantage. Could have suffered. Further, there is a possibility that a criminal intentionally stops supplying power to a gaming machine and tries to gain an unfair advantage.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, there is provided a gaming machine capable of easily avoiding inconvenience caused by occurrence of a power failure with respect to entry of a game ball into a specific area which generates a gaming state advantageous to a player. be able to. That is, even in a situation where a predetermined power outage state has occurred, the control to advance the special game state is executed in a predetermined period including a period in which the approachable state is generated. For this reason, the game ball that was supposed to enter the specific area has stopped entering the specific area due to the occurrence of a power outage, and the player who was playing the game properly suffered disadvantage, or the criminal intentionally caused the power outage state As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which an attempt is made to unjustly aim to allow the game ball to enter the specific area unfairly.

<Feature 91>
The power outage control means may be configured such that when the operation control means performs control for generating the approachable state, even if the predetermined power outage state occurs, the approachable state is maintained before the approachable state is started. Information updating means for updating the time information corresponding to the progress of the special game state during the period until the end of the special game state (update processing of the special symbol-related control timer of the main control board 920 when the power failure preparation flag is on) A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 91, even if a predetermined power failure state occurs, the time information updating means can continue to update the time information over a period until the approachable state ends, so that the specific area It is possible to suppress the influence of the occurrence of the power failure on the entry of the game ball into the game device, and to easily avoid the inconvenience caused by the occurrence of the power failure.

<Feature 92>
Display means (decorative symbol display device 479) for displaying a predetermined lottery result including a lottery result relating to the execution of the special game state;
Display control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling display contents of the display means,
The power failure control means controls the predetermined control including the control of the display means by the display control means when the predetermined power failure state occurs, by controlling the operation of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism by the operation control means. A gaming machine characterized in that it stops prior to some controls including

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 92, power consumption by display control of the display means can be suppressed, and the amount can be distributed to a part of control including control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism. Therefore, the progress of the game in the special game state relating to the entry of the game ball into the specific area can be easily continued using the limited power.

<Feature A0>
A gaming machine in which a special gaming state in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given more than a normal gaming state is more likely to be established when a predetermined winning condition is established, wherein the special gaming state combines a plurality of rounds Gaming machine configured with
A game ball can be distributed to a plurality of regions including a specific region (specific passage TA), and an attainable state (guidance posture) in which the game ball can enter the specific region in at least a part of the plurality of rounds is set. A distributing mechanism that can be generated (distributing mechanisms 601 and 1601);
A switching mechanism (upper prize winning device 434, 1434) provided upstream of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not a game ball is advanced to the distribution mechanism side;
An operation control means for performing the control including the operation control of the distributing mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state (the distributing mechanisms 601 and 1601 on the main control board 920 and the control units of the upper winning award device 434 and 1434) )When,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control unit (a control unit for the game state in the main control board 920) that generates a specific game state that is more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area. Prepared,
As the special game state, a first special game state (a special game state of a 16R big hit (V non-winning)) and a second special game state in which a probability that a game ball enters the specific area is higher than in the first special game state. Game state (special game state of 16R big hit (V winning)) is provided,
In the case where the first special game state has occurred, the entry suppression means (the ball transport device 602, the power failure monitoring process S9202, and the lower prize winning device 2433) for suppressing the entry of the game ball into the specific area is provided. A gaming machine characterized by:

  Conventional gaming machines are provided with a variable winning device that takes an entry-permissible state that allows a game ball to enter when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When a game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters a specific area, the player There is known a gaming machine that is in a gaming state that is advantageous for the player (see, for example, JP-A-2009-28117).

  In the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of types of gaming states (special gaming states) having different probabilities that gaming balls enter the specific area are set to be generated, the gaming balls enter the specific area in each special gaming state. It is preferable that the probability of execution is a probability according to the manufacturer's setting, and there is room for improvement in this regard.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature A0, in the special game state in which the probability that the gaming ball enters the specific area is set low, it is easy to avoid a situation where the gaming ball accidentally enters the specific area. Can be provided. That is, in the first special game state in which the probability that the game ball enters the specific area is lower than that in the second special game state, the entry suppression means prevents the game ball from entering the specific area, and thus the first special game state. Maker can avoid a situation where the maker side unfairly obtains the profit set so that the player cannot obtain it.

<Feature A1>
In the gaming machine described in the feature A0,
The operation control means sets, as a part of the second special game state, a progress period during which a predetermined number of game balls set to at least two or more can progress from the distribution mechanism to the side where the specific area is provided. To generate,
The gaming machine, wherein the entry suppressing means causes the game balls to enter the specific area when the predetermined number or more of the game balls advance toward the specific area from the distribution mechanism in the advanceable period.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature A1, it is possible to cause the game balls to enter the specific area only when the predetermined number of the plurality of game balls has advanced to the side where the specific area is provided from the distribution mechanism. Therefore, in a situation where one game ball has accidentally advanced to the specific region side from the distribution mechanism, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the specific region.

  Note that at least one feature described in the features 10 to A1 may be applied in combination with any other or a plurality of features. Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko machine: launch operation means operated by a player, game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launch operation means, a passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine, comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a game area; wherein a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player is operated according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that grants benefits.

  As described above, the present invention is suitable for a game machine such as a ball game machine.

  100: gaming machine, 330: launching device, 400, 1400: gaming board, 433, 1433: lower prize winning device, 433A, 1433A: lower prize winning opening, 434, 1434: upper prize winning device, 434A, 1434A: upper large Winning opening, 454, 1454 ... Upper entry control mechanism, 471 ... Special symbol display device related to the first special symbol, 472 ... Special symbol display device related to the second special symbol, 479 ... Decorative symbol display device, 601, 1601 ... Minute mechanism, 602: Ball transfer device, 603: Right-handed detection switch, 920: Main control board, 940: Sub-control board, 2433: Lower winning a prize device, KD: Connection path, S1 to S5: Movable projecting piece, TA ... Specific passage

Claims (2)

A gaming machine in which a special gaming state in which a winning condition in which a gaming value is given more than a normal gaming state is more likely to be established when a predetermined winning condition is established, wherein the special gaming state combines a plurality of rounds Gaming machine configured with
A distribution mechanism capable of distributing game balls to a plurality of regions including the specific region, and capable of generating an accessible state in which the game ball can enter the specific region in at least a part of the plurality of rounds,
A switching mechanism provided upstream of the distribution mechanism and capable of switching whether or not to advance a game ball to the distribution mechanism;
Operation control means for performing control including operation control of the distribution mechanism and the switching mechanism to generate the special game state,
When a game ball enters the specific area, a game state control unit that generates a specific game state more advantageous than when the game ball does not enter the specific area,
As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state having a higher probability that a game ball enters the specific area as compared to the first special game state are provided.
The operation control means sets, as a part of the second special game state, a progress period during which a predetermined number of game balls set to at least two or more can progress from the distribution mechanism to the side where the specific area is provided. To generate,
Means for suppressing entry of a game ball into the specific area when the first special game state has occurred and when the second special game state has occurred. A gaming machine, characterized in that an entry suppression means is provided for entering game balls into the specific area when the predetermined number or more game balls advance to the specific area . 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.